1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1450 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1451 When the cursor is inside an inset
1454 arg "inset-select-all"
1457 selects the content of the inset.
1461 arg "inset-select-all"
1464 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1469 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1472 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1476 \begin_layout Section
1478 \begin_inset Index idx
1481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1488 \begin_inset Index idx
1491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1500 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1507 \begin_layout Standard
1508 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1509 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1512 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1515 or the toolbar button
1521 to undo some mistake.
1522 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1524 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1527 or the toolbar button
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1545 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1548 \begin_layout Standard
1549 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1558 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1559 This is a consequence of the 100
1560 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1563 step undo limit mentioned above.
1566 \begin_layout Standard
1575 work on almost everything in LyX.
1576 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1580 \begin_layout Section
1582 \begin_inset Index idx
1585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1594 \begin_layout Standard
1595 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1598 \begin_layout Enumerate
1603 \begin_layout Itemize
1608 once anywhere in the edit window.
1609 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1613 \begin_layout Enumerate
1618 \begin_layout Itemize
1624 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1627 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1630 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1633 \begin_layout Itemize
1634 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1636 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1643 \begin_layout Enumerate
1644 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1648 \begin_layout Standard
1649 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1650 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1654 \begin_layout Section
1656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1658 name "sec:Navigating"
1663 \begin_inset Index idx
1666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1675 \begin_layout Standard
1676 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1679 \begin_layout Itemize
1684 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1685 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1688 \begin_layout Itemize
1689 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1691 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1693 \begin_inset space ~
1698 or by the toolbar button
1701 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1707 \begin_layout Itemize
1708 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1710 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1713 and use the same menu to return to them.
1714 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1717 \begin_layout Standard
1721 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1726 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1727 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1729 \begin_inset space ~
1734 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1735 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1736 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1737 your last editing position.
1740 \begin_layout Standard
1745 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1748 \begin_layout Subsection
1750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1752 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1759 \begin_layout Standard
1760 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1761 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1762 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1770 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1774 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1781 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1786 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1790 \begin_layout Standard
1791 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1792 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1793 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1794 dialog and to modify the citation.
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1800 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1801 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1809 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1813 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1814 you further to control the display.
1819 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1820 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1826 option keeps it in the current view state.
1827 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1831 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 3, the subsections of sections
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1844 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1849 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1859 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1862 \begin_layout Standard
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/reload.png
1874 \begin_inset space ~
1877 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1878 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1881 \begin_inset space \space{}
1885 \begin_inset Graphics
1886 filename ../images/down.png
1888 groupId toolbarbuttons
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1897 \begin_inset space \space{}
1901 \begin_inset Graphics
1902 filename ../images/up.png
1904 groupId toolbarbuttons
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1912 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1913 So, for example, you can move section
1914 \begin_inset space ~
1918 \begin_inset space ~
1921 2.4 or after section
1922 \begin_inset space ~
1926 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1928 \begin_inset Graphics
1929 filename ../images/promote.png
1931 groupId toolbarbuttons
1936 \begin_inset Graphics
1937 filename ../images/demote.png
1939 groupId toolbarbuttons
1943 (or the corresponding key bindings
1951 ) you can change the level of sections.
1952 So you can for example make section
1953 \begin_inset space ~
1957 \begin_inset space ~
1961 \begin_inset space ~
1967 \begin_layout Section
1968 Input/Word Completion
1969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1971 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1976 \begin_inset Index idx
1979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1986 \begin_inset Index idx
1989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2020 \begin_layout Standard
2021 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2023 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2024 is used to propose completions.
2027 \begin_layout Standard
2028 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2030 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2035 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2042 \begin_inset space ~
2046 \begin_inset space ~
2051 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2055 \begin_inset space ~
2060 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2061 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2065 \begin_inset space ~
2071 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2072 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2073 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2074 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2077 \begin_layout Standard
2078 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2079 are completions available.
2084 key to accept a proposed completion.
2085 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2086 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2087 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2094 \begin_layout Standard
2095 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2096 ing options for text.
2097 The special math option
2101 enables characters to be composed.
2102 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2103 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2106 , you can then input the characters
2107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2118 to a formula to get it.
2119 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2120 of the math toolbar.
2121 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2125 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2126 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2135 \begin_layout Section
2137 \begin_inset Index idx
2140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_inset Index idx
2182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2213 \begin_layout Standard
2214 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2227 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2229 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2233 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2240 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2247 \begin_layout Standard
2251 \begin_inset space ~
2259 \begin_inset space ~
2280 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2284 \begin_layout Labeling
2285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2289 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2290 LatexCommand nomenclature
2292 description "Tabulator key"
2298 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2299 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2300 \begin_inset space ~
2304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2306 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2313 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2317 , especially section
2318 \begin_inset space ~
2322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2324 reference "sub:Lists"
2330 If you are still confused, look in the
2335 \begin_inset Newline newline
2342 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2343 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2347 \begin_layout Labeling
2348 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2352 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2353 LatexCommand nomenclature
2355 description "Escape key"
2362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2369 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2370 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2373 \begin_layout Labeling
2374 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2380 \begin_inset space ~
2384 \begin_inset space ~
2391 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2392 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2396 \begin_layout Standard
2397 There are three modifier keys:
2400 \begin_layout Labeling
2401 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2419 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2420 LatexCommand nomenclature
2422 description "Control key"
2426 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2427 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2431 \begin_layout Itemize
2440 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2443 \begin_layout Itemize
2452 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2455 \begin_layout Itemize
2464 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2468 \begin_layout Labeling
2469 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2487 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2488 LatexCommand nomenclature
2490 description "Shift key"
2494 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2495 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2498 \begin_layout Labeling
2499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2517 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2518 LatexCommand nomenclature
2520 description "Alt or Meta key"
2524 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2525 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2526 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2532 \begin_inset Newline newline
2535 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2537 menu accelerator keys
2540 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2541 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2545 \begin_layout Standard
2546 For example, the sequence
2547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2557 \begin_inset space ~
2563 \begin_inset space ~
2571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2590 \begin_inset space ~
2596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2606 \begin_layout Standard
2611 manual lists all other things bound to the
2619 \begin_layout Standard
2620 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2621 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2622 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2623 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2624 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2625 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2626 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2628 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2644 followed by a capital
2651 \begin_layout Chapter
2653 \begin_inset Index idx
2656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2665 \begin_layout Section
2667 \begin_inset Index idx
2670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2679 \begin_layout Subsection
2683 \begin_layout Standard
2684 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2685 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2686 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2687 numbering schemes, and so on.
2688 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2689 and format the title of your document differently.
2692 \begin_layout Standard
2697 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2698 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2699 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2700 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2701 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2704 \begin_layout Subsection
2706 \begin_inset Index idx
2709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2718 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2725 \begin_layout Standard
2726 You can select a class using the
2728 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2729 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2733 \begin_inset Index idx
2736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2743 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2751 \begin_layout Standard
2752 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2756 \begin_layout Description
2757 Article for basic articles
2760 \begin_layout Description
2761 Report for basic reports
2764 \begin_layout Description
2765 Book for writing a book
2768 \begin_layout Description
2769 Letter for US-style letters
2772 \begin_layout Standard
2773 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2774 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2775 will include many of these.
2776 Here are some of the classes.
2777 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2779 Special Document Classes
2788 \begin_layout Description
2789 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2792 \begin_layout Description
2793 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2797 \begin_layout Description
2798 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2802 \begin_layout Description
2803 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2804 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2805 There are three article layouts available.
2806 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2807 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2808 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2809 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2814 sequential numbering
2815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2818 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2819 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2820 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2821 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2824 \begin_layout Description
2825 Beamer Layout for presentations
2828 \begin_layout Description
2829 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2830 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2834 \begin_layout Description
2835 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2838 \begin_layout Description
2840 \begin_inset space ~
2843 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Foils Used to make transparencies
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2856 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2862 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2865 \begin_layout Description
2866 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2869 \begin_layout Description
2870 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2873 \begin_layout Description
2874 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2875 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2876 (Is used by this document.)
2879 \begin_layout Description
2880 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2883 \begin_layout Description
2884 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2887 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2899 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2900 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2902 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2905 \begin_layout Description
2906 Slides Used to make transparencies
2909 \begin_layout Description
2911 \begin_inset space ~
2914 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2915 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2918 \begin_layout Description
2919 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2922 \begin_layout Standard
2923 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2925 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2931 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2932 of the document classes.
2935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2939 \begin_layout Standard
2940 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2942 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2943 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2945 \begin_inset Index idx
2948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2965 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2966 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2968 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2971 \begin_layout Standard
2973 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2974 and some of them, like
2978 , are highly specialized.
2979 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2980 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2982 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2983 by some document class.
2984 There are just too many of them.
2985 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2988 \begin_layout Standard
2989 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2997 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2998 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2999 document class for a new file.
3000 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3005 Installing new LaTeX files
3006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3013 manual for information on how to install them.
3014 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3020 \begin_layout Standard
3021 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3022 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3024 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3025 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3026 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3028 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3032 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3038 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3050 \begin_inset Index idx
3053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3062 \begin_layout Standard
3063 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3064 chosen document class.
3065 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3066 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3073 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3077 \begin_inset Index idx
3080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3087 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3091 \begin_layout Standard
3092 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3093 always installed by default.
3094 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3095 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3096 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3097 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3098 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3099 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3100 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3103 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3107 \begin_inset Index idx
3110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3111 Reconfiguration of LyX
3117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 Installing new LaTeX files
3121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3128 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3131 \begin_layout Standard
3132 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3141 LyX will advise you about these things.
3149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3153 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3158 \begin_inset Index idx
3161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3162 Document ! Local Layout
3170 \begin_layout Standard
3171 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3172 used in a variety of different documents.
3173 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3174 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3175 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3176 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3177 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3178 What you want is LyX's
3179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3195 manual for information on how to use it.
3198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3202 \begin_layout Standard
3203 Each class has a default set of options.
3204 Here's a quick table describing them:
3207 \begin_layout Standard
3208 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3214 \begin_layout Standard
3216 \begin_inset Tabular
3217 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3218 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3219 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3220 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3221 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3222 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3223 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3677 \begin_layout Standard
3678 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3684 \begin_layout Standard
3685 You're probably also wondering what
3686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3690 \begin_inset space ~
3694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3698 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3699 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3704 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3709 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3719 headings, there are also
3727 headings, and so on.
3728 We will describe these headings fully in section
3729 \begin_inset space ~
3733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3735 reference "sub:Headings"
3742 \begin_layout Subsection
3744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3746 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3751 \begin_inset Index idx
3754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3761 \begin_inset Index idx
3764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3773 \begin_layout Standard
3774 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3776 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3783 \begin_inset space ~
3791 \begin_inset space ~
3796 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3798 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3799 to use for your document.
3800 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3804 \begin_layout Standard
3808 \begin_inset space ~
3815 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3821 \begin_inset space ~
3826 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3827 You can choose between the following five options:
3830 \begin_layout Labeling
3831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3836 Use default page style of current class.
3839 \begin_layout Labeling
3840 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3845 No page numbers or headings.
3848 \begin_layout Labeling
3849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3857 \begin_layout Labeling
3858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3863 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3864 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3865 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3868 \begin_layout Labeling
3869 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3874 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3875 have the LaTeX-package
3880 \begin_inset Index idx
3883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3884 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3890 How they are defined is explained in section
3891 \begin_inset space ~
3895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3897 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3904 \begin_layout Standard
3905 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3906 \begin_inset space ~
3910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3912 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3919 \begin_layout Subsection
3920 Paper Size and Orientation
3921 \begin_inset Index idx
3924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3925 Document ! Paper size
3931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3933 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3940 \begin_layout Standard
3941 You can find the following options in the menu
3944 \begin_inset space ~
3951 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3955 \begin_inset Index idx
3958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3967 \begin_layout Labeling
3968 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3977 What size paper to print on.
3982 \begin_layout Itemize
3988 \begin_layout Itemize
3994 \begin_layout Itemize
4000 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Itemize
4009 US letter, US legal, US executive
4012 \begin_layout Itemize
4018 \begin_layout Itemize
4025 \begin_layout Labeling
4026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4031 To choose whether to output as
4042 \begin_layout Labeling
4043 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_inset space ~
4052 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4053 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4056 \begin_layout Subsection
4058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4065 \begin_inset Index idx
4068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 Paper margins are set in the menu
4090 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4094 \begin_inset Index idx
4097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4106 \begin_layout Standard
4107 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4108 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4109 the paper format and the font size into account.
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4116 \begin_layout Standard
4117 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4122 That includes the paragraph environments.
4123 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4124 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4125 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4126 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4135 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4137 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4138 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4139 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4142 \begin_layout Section
4143 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4144 \begin_inset Index idx
4147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4148 Paragraph ! Indentation
4156 \begin_layout Subsection
4158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4160 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4167 \begin_layout Standard
4168 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4169 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4172 \begin_layout Standard
4173 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4174 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4175 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4176 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4180 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4186 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4187 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4188 language than English.
4189 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4193 \begin_layout Standard
4194 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4195 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4197 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4198 LyX takes care of that.
4199 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4201 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4202 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4203 of a page, and so on.
4207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4208 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4213 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4214 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4218 these pre-coded spacings.
4219 We will explain more later.
4222 \begin_layout Subsection
4223 Paragraph Separation
4224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4226 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4231 \begin_inset Index idx
4234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4235 Paragraph ! Separation
4243 \begin_layout Standard
4251 \begin_inset space ~
4259 \begin_inset space ~
4266 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4270 \begin_inset Index idx
4273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4279 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4282 \begin_layout Subsection
4286 \begin_layout Standard
4287 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4290 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4292 \begin_inset space ~
4297 dialog and toggle the
4300 \begin_inset space ~
4305 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4308 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4312 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4313 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4318 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4319 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4322 \begin_layout Subsection
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4328 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4336 \begin_layout Standard
4339 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4343 \begin_inset Index idx
4346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4355 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4359 \begin_inset space ~
4368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4369 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4374 \begin_inset Index idx
4377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4378 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4383 installed to use this feature.
4388 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4390 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4392 \begin_inset space ~
4397 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4398 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4401 \begin_layout Section
4402 Paragraph Environments
4403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4405 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4410 \begin_inset Index idx
4413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 Paragraph ! Environments
4420 \begin_inset Index idx
4423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4424 Paragraph environments|(
4432 \begin_layout Subsection
4436 \begin_layout Standard
4437 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4440 \begin_layout Standard
4459 \begin_inset Newline newline
4462 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4463 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4464 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4473 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4476 \begin_layout Standard
4477 A paragraph environment is simply a
4478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4485 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4486 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4487 scheme, labels, and so on.
4488 Additionally, you can
4489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4496 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4497 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4498 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4499 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4501 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4503 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4506 \begin_layout Standard
4507 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4508 \begin_inset Graphics
4509 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4515 at the left end of the toolbar.
4516 LyX will change the environment of the
4520 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4521 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4522 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4526 \begin_layout Standard
4535 create a new paragraph using the
4539 paragraph environment.
4541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4548 because if you are in one of these environments:
4551 \begin_layout Itemize
4557 \begin_layout Itemize
4563 \begin_layout Itemize
4569 \begin_layout Itemize
4575 \begin_layout Itemize
4581 \begin_layout Itemize
4587 \begin_layout Itemize
4593 \begin_layout Standard
4594 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4598 , rather than resetting it to
4603 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4604 \begin_inset space ~
4608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4610 reference "sec:Nesting"
4617 \begin_layout Subsection
4621 \begin_layout Standard
4622 The default paragraph environment is
4627 It creates a plain paragraph.
4628 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4629 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4630 this manual) are in the
4637 \begin_layout Standard
4638 You can nest a paragraph using the
4642 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4650 \begin_layout Subsection
4652 \begin_inset Index idx
4655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4664 \begin_layout Standard
4665 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4674 for thanks or contact information.
4675 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4676 page along with today's date.
4677 For other types of documents, the title
4678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4685 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4689 \begin_layout Standard
4690 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4704 Here's how you use them:
4707 \begin_layout Itemize
4708 Put the title of your document in the
4715 \begin_layout Itemize
4716 Put the author name in the
4723 \begin_layout Itemize
4724 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4725 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4731 Note that using this environment is optional.
4732 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4733 If you don't want a date, use the option
4735 Suppress default date on front page
4739 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4740 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4742 \begin_inset space ~
4750 \begin_layout Standard
4751 You can use footnotes to insert
4752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4759 or contact information.
4762 \begin_layout Subsection
4764 \begin_inset Index idx
4767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4785 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4790 \begin_inset Index idx
4793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4794 Section headings ! Numbered
4802 \begin_layout Standard
4803 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4807 \begin_layout Enumerate
4813 \begin_layout Enumerate
4819 \begin_layout Enumerate
4825 \begin_layout Enumerate
4831 \begin_layout Enumerate
4837 \begin_layout Enumerate
4843 \begin_layout Enumerate
4849 \begin_layout Standard
4850 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4851 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4852 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4855 \begin_layout Standard
4856 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4857 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4858 You group the book into chapters.
4859 LyX does a similar grouping:
4862 \begin_layout Itemize
4867 is divided into either
4878 \begin_layout Itemize
4890 \begin_layout Itemize
4902 \begin_layout Itemize
4914 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Standard
4939 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4947 Not all document types use the
4951 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4956 is the top-level heading.
4964 \begin_layout Standard
4969 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4970 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4972 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4986 \begin_inset Index idx
4989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4990 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4998 \begin_layout Standard
4999 The unnumbered section headings have a
5000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5007 at the end of their name.
5008 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5009 the table of contents, see section
5010 \begin_inset space ~
5014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5024 Changing the Numbering
5025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5027 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5034 \begin_layout Standard
5035 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5036 in the Table of Contents.
5037 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5039 Just as certain classes start with
5053 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5063 This is something you can change.
5066 \begin_layout Standard
5069 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5073 \begin_inset Index idx
5076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5085 \begin_inset space ~
5089 \begin_inset space ~
5094 you will see two counters.
5099 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5101 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5106 Short Titles of Headings
5107 \begin_inset Index idx
5110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5111 Section headings ! Short titles
5117 \begin_inset Argument 1
5120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5129 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5136 \begin_layout Standard
5137 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5138 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5139 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5140 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5143 \begin_layout Standard
5144 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5145 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5146 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5147 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5150 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5152 \begin_inset space ~
5158 This will insert a box labeled
5159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5163 \begin_inset space ~
5167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5170 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5171 This also works for captions inside floats.
5172 There can only be one short title per title.
5175 \begin_layout Standard
5176 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5183 \begin_layout Standard
5184 The following information applies to all section headings:
5187 \begin_layout Itemize
5188 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5191 \begin_layout Itemize
5192 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5195 \begin_layout Itemize
5196 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5199 \begin_layout Itemize
5200 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5203 \begin_layout Subsection
5207 \begin_layout Standard
5208 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5222 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5223 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5224 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5225 the text they contain.
5226 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5234 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5237 \begin_layout Standard
5238 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5247 when you start a new paragraph.
5248 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5252 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5253 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5254 have to change back to the
5258 environment yourself.
5261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5270 \begin_inset Index idx
5273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5283 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5284 time for the differences.
5293 are identical except for one difference:
5297 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5306 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5309 \begin_layout Standard
5310 Here's an example of the
5323 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5325 See – no indentation!
5329 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5330 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5331 the other paragraph.
5334 \begin_layout Standard
5335 Here's another example, this time in the
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5348 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5349 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5350 the first line, then
5354 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5358 you were quoting other text.
5361 \begin_layout Quotation
5362 Here's a new paragraph.
5363 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5364 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5367 \begin_layout Standard
5368 As the examples show,
5372 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5373 They should put quotes in the
5378 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5382 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5387 \begin_inset Index idx
5390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5397 \begin_inset Index idx
5400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5416 \begin_layout Standard
5421 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5427 \begin_inset Newline newline
5430 Which I did not rehearse!
5434 It could be much worse.
5435 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5437 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5438 indented a bit more than the first.
5439 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5445 \begin_inset Newline newline
5448 And make things look fine
5449 \begin_inset Newline newline
5455 arg "newline-insert newline"
5461 \begin_layout Standard
5466 does not indent both margins.
5467 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5468 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5471 arg "newline-insert newline"
5477 \begin_layout Subsection
5479 \begin_inset Index idx
5482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5498 \begin_layout Standard
5499 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5509 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5518 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5519 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5520 describing some general features of all four of them.
5523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5530 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5539 reset the environment to
5543 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5544 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5545 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5549 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5553 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5560 \begin_layout Standard
5561 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5562 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5564 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5565 you read all of section
5566 \begin_inset space ~
5570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5572 reference "sec:Nesting"
5579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_inset Index idx
5584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5600 \begin_layout Standard
5601 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5605 paragraph environment.
5606 It has the following properties:
5609 \begin_layout Itemize
5610 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5614 \begin_layout Itemize
5615 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5618 \begin_layout Itemize
5619 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5623 \begin_layout Itemize
5624 The items can have any length.
5625 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5626 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5633 \begin_layout Itemize
5638 environment inside another
5642 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5646 \begin_layout Itemize
5647 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5650 \begin_layout Itemize
5651 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5654 \begin_layout Itemize
5656 \begin_inset space ~
5660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5662 reference "sec:Nesting"
5666 for a full explanation of nesting.
5670 \begin_layout Standard
5671 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5680 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5683 \begin_layout Standard
5684 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5685 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5688 \begin_layout Itemize
5689 The label for the first level
5693 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5697 \begin_layout Itemize
5698 The label for the second level is a dash.
5702 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5708 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5712 \begin_layout Itemize
5713 Back out to the third level.
5717 \begin_layout Itemize
5718 Back to the second level.
5722 \begin_layout Itemize
5723 Back to the outermost level.
5726 \begin_layout Standard
5727 These are the default labels for an
5732 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5734 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5737 dialog in the submenu
5742 \begin_inset Index idx
5745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5751 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5754 \begin_layout Standard
5755 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5756 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5758 \begin_inset space ~
5762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5764 reference "sec:Nesting"
5771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5773 \begin_inset Index idx
5776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5785 name "sec:Enumerate"
5792 \begin_layout Standard
5797 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5798 It has these properties:
5801 \begin_layout Enumerate
5802 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5806 \begin_layout Enumerate
5807 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5811 \begin_layout Enumerate
5812 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5815 \begin_layout Enumerate
5820 environment resets the counter to one.
5823 \begin_layout Enumerate
5836 \begin_layout Enumerate
5837 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5838 Items can have any length.
5841 \begin_layout Enumerate
5842 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5845 \begin_layout Enumerate
5846 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5849 \begin_layout Enumerate
5850 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5854 \begin_layout Standard
5863 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5864 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5872 The first level of an
5876 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5880 \begin_layout Enumerate
5881 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5885 \begin_layout Enumerate
5886 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5890 \begin_layout Enumerate
5891 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5894 \begin_layout Enumerate
5895 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5900 \begin_layout Enumerate
5901 Back to the third level
5905 \begin_layout Enumerate
5906 Back to the second level.
5910 \begin_layout Enumerate
5911 Back to the outermost level.
5914 \begin_layout Standard
5915 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5919 environment, see section
5920 \begin_inset space ~
5924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5926 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5931 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5934 \begin_layout Standard
5935 There is more to nesting
5939 environments than we've stated here.
5940 You should read section
5941 \begin_inset space ~
5945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5947 reference "sec:Nesting"
5951 to learn more about nesting.
5954 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5956 \begin_inset Index idx
5959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5968 \begin_layout Standard
5969 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5973 list has no fixed label.
5974 Instead, LyX uses the first
5975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5982 of the first line as the label.
5986 \begin_layout Description
5987 Example: This is an example of the
5994 \begin_layout Standard
5995 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5999 \begin_layout Standard
6001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6008 it is meant that the first usage of the
6012 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6014 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6022 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6027 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6028 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6030 \begin_inset space ~
6036 \begin_inset space ~
6040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6042 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6046 for more information.) Here is an example:
6049 \begin_layout Description
6051 \begin_inset space ~
6054 Example: This one shows how to use a
6057 \begin_inset space ~
6069 \begin_layout Description
6070 Usage: You should use the
6074 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6075 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6077 It's not a good idea to use a
6081 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6082 You're better off using
6094 paragraphs into them.
6097 \begin_layout Description
6098 Nesting: You can nest
6102 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6107 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6108 them from the first line.
6111 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6113 \begin_inset Index idx
6116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6125 \begin_layout Standard
6130 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6133 \begin_layout Standard
6142 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6144 Here are its properties:
6147 \begin_layout Labeling
6148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6153 labels LyX uses the first
6154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6161 of each line as the item label.
6166 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6167 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6168 space as described above.
6171 \begin_layout Labeling
6172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6173 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6174 the body of the item text.
6175 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6176 label width plus a little extra space.
6180 \begin_layout Labeling
6181 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6183 \begin_inset space ~
6186 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6188 If the label width is larger, the label
6189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6196 into the first line.
6197 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6198 margin of the rest of the item text.
6201 \begin_layout Labeling
6202 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6204 \begin_inset space ~
6207 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6212 environment has the same left margin.
6213 \begin_inset Newline newline
6216 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6219 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6221 \begin_inset space ~
6226 dialog (toolbar button
6229 arg "layout-paragraph"
6236 \begin_inset space ~
6241 determines the default label width.
6242 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6251 multiple times instead.
6252 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6261 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6269 every time you alter a label in a
6274 \begin_inset Newline newline
6277 The predefined default width is the length of
6278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6286 \begin_inset space ~
6292 \begin_layout Standard
6297 list the same way as the
6301 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6307 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6311 \begin_layout Standard
6316 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6317 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6319 \begin_inset space ~
6323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6325 reference "sec:Nesting"
6329 to learn about nesting.
6332 \begin_layout Standard
6333 There is yet another feature of the
6337 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6339 You can use additional
6343 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6348 are documented in section
6349 \begin_inset space ~
6353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6355 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6360 Here are some examples:
6363 \begin_layout Labeling
6364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6365 Left The default for
6372 \begin_layout Labeling
6373 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6374 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6381 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6390 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6397 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6400 \begin_layout Subsection
6402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6404 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6409 \begin_inset Index idx
6412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6421 \begin_layout Standard
6422 The features described in this section require that the module
6424 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6426 is loaded in the document settings.
6427 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6432 \begin_inset Index idx
6435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6436 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6445 Custom Enumerate Lists
6446 \begin_inset Index idx
6449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6450 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6458 \begin_layout Standard
6460 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6463 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6466 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6467 There you add the command
6470 \begin_layout Standard
6478 \begin_layout Standard
6479 in TeX Code (shortcut
6489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6490 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6491 \begin_inset space ~
6495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6497 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6510 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6517 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6518 For capital Roman numerals replace
6530 in the command above.
6531 For Arabic numerals use
6539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6546 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6561 \begin_layout Standard
6563 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6571 You can only number 26
6572 \begin_inset space ~
6575 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6583 \begin_layout Standard
6584 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6585 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6588 \begin_layout Standard
6589 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6592 \begin_layout Enumerate
6593 \begin_inset Argument 1
6596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6622 \begin_layout Enumerate
6623 \begin_inset Argument 1
6626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6649 \begin_layout Enumerate
6654 \begin_layout Enumerate
6655 \begin_inset Argument 1
6658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6682 \begin_layout Enumerate
6683 \begin_inset Argument 1
6686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6712 \begin_layout Standard
6713 For this list these commands were used:
6716 \begin_layout Standard
6727 \begin_inset Newline newline
6735 \begin_inset Newline newline
6743 \begin_inset Newline newline
6753 \begin_layout Standard
6760 makes the label emphasized and
6769 \begin_layout Standard
6770 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6779 lists until you change the definition.
6787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6789 \begin_inset Index idx
6792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6793 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6801 \begin_layout Standard
6802 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6805 \begin_layout Enumerate
6806 \begin_inset Argument 1
6809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6828 \begin_inset Note Note
6831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6832 goes back to default numbering
6840 \begin_layout Enumerate
6844 \begin_layout Standard
6848 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6852 \begin_layout Standard
6853 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6858 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6859 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6863 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6871 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6880 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6882 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6883 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6884 of a normal enumeration.
6885 There, insert the command
6888 \begin_layout Standard
6894 \begin_layout Standard
6899 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6903 \begin_layout Enumerate
6907 \begin_layout Enumerate
6911 \begin_layout Standard
6912 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6915 \begin_layout Enumerate
6916 \begin_inset Argument 1
6919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 This enumeration starts at 4
6938 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6940 \begin_inset Index idx
6943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6952 \begin_layout Standard
6953 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6955 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6958 \begin_layout Itemize
6962 \begin_layout Itemize
6963 with standard spacing
6966 \begin_layout Standard
6967 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6969 Add there the command
6973 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6976 \begin_layout Itemize
6977 \begin_inset Argument 1
6980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 \begin_layout Itemize
7003 \begin_layout Itemize
7007 \begin_layout Standard
7008 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
7014 \begin_inset Index idx
7017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7018 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7024 For more information see its documentation,
7025 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7034 \begin_layout Standard
7035 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7037 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7038 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7042 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7045 \begin_layout Enumerate
7046 \begin_inset Argument 1
7049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7057 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7070 \begin_layout Enumerate
7071 with negative indentation
7074 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7075 Further Customization
7076 \begin_inset Index idx
7079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 Lists ! Customization
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7089 You can also change the style of description lists.
7093 \begin_layout Standard
7099 \begin_layout Standard
7100 changes the description label font, the command
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 sets the list style.
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 An example where the command
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7122 itshape, style=nextline
7125 \begin_layout Standard
7129 \begin_layout Description
7131 \begin_inset space ~
7135 \begin_inset Argument 1
7138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7144 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7146 itshape, style=nextline
7156 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7157 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7161 \begin_layout Description
7163 \begin_inset space ~
7166 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7167 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7168 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7171 \begin_layout Standard
7172 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7178 \begin_inset Index idx
7181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7182 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7188 For more information see its documentation
7189 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7198 \begin_layout Subsection
7200 \begin_inset Index idx
7203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7214 \begin_inset space ~
7217 Address: An Overview
7220 \begin_layout Standard
7221 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7229 \begin_inset space ~
7235 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7236 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7237 In contrast, you can use the
7244 \begin_inset space ~
7249 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7250 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 Of course, you're not limited to using
7262 \begin_inset space ~
7271 \begin_inset space ~
7276 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7277 some European academic papers.
7280 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7284 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7291 \begin_layout Standard
7296 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7297 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7301 \begin_inset space ~
7306 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7307 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7308 Here's an example of each:
7311 \begin_layout Right Address
7313 \begin_inset Newline newline
7317 \begin_inset Newline newline
7321 \begin_inset Newline newline
7324 When is it? What is today?
7327 \begin_layout Standard
7331 \begin_inset space ~
7337 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7338 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7339 Here's an example of the
7346 \begin_layout Address
7348 \begin_inset Newline newline
7351 Where do I send this
7352 \begin_inset Newline newline
7355 Your post office and country
7358 \begin_layout Standard
7359 As you can see, both
7366 \begin_inset space ~
7371 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7376 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7382 This makes sense, since
7390 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7391 Thus, you have to use
7398 arg "newline-insert newline"
7403 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7404 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7406 \begin_inset space ~
7410 \begin_inset space ~
7415 ) to start a new line in an
7422 \begin_inset space ~
7430 \begin_layout Subsection
7434 \begin_layout Standard
7435 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7436 or list of references.
7437 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7440 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7442 \begin_inset Index idx
7445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7454 \begin_layout Standard
7459 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7460 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7461 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7462 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7476 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7477 The book document classes ignores the
7481 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7485 in a letter document class.
7488 \begin_layout Standard
7493 environment does several things for you.
7494 First, it puts the centered label
7495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7503 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7505 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7506 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7507 the subsequent text.
7508 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7509 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7514 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7518 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7519 The new paragraph will still be in the
7524 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7525 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7528 \begin_layout Standard
7529 \begin_inset Float figure
7534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7536 \begin_inset Graphics
7537 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7545 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7550 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7571 \begin_layout Standard
7572 We would love to demonstrate the
7576 environment, but since this document is in the
7577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7584 class, we can't do this.
7585 We inserted it therefore as figure
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7592 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7597 If you have never heard of an
7598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7605 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7610 \begin_inset Index idx
7613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7622 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7629 \begin_layout Standard
7634 environment is used to list references.
7635 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7636 only use it at the end of the document.
7648 \begin_layout Standard
7649 When you first open a
7653 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7669 depending on the document class.
7670 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7671 Each paragraph of the
7675 environment is a bibliography entry.
7680 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7681 Each new paragraph is still in the
7688 \begin_layout Standard
7689 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7690 by using a BibTeX database.
7691 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7692 phy handling, have a look at section
7693 \begin_inset space ~
7697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7699 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7706 \begin_layout Subsection
7707 Special Environments
7710 \begin_layout Standard
7711 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7712 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7719 \begin_inset Index idx
7722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7738 \begin_layout Standard
7743 environment is a LyX extension.
7744 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7749 key as a fixed whitespace.
7753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7765 \begin_inset space ~
7770 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7783 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7785 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7788 arg "newline-insert newline"
7805 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7806 So, when you finish using the
7810 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7811 Also, you can nest the
7815 environment inside of others.
7818 \begin_layout Standard
7819 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7822 \begin_layout Itemize
7826 arg "newline-insert newline"
7829 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7834 \begin_inset space \space{}
7844 arg "newline-insert newline"
7850 \begin_layout Itemize
7854 arg "newline-insert newline"
7864 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7870 \begin_layout Itemize
7871 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7872 You must put at least one
7876 in any line you want blank.
7877 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7880 \begin_layout Itemize
7881 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7885 since that will insert
7890 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7893 arg "self-insert \""
7899 \begin_layout Standard
7903 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7907 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7911 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7915 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7919 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7920 printf("Hello World!
7925 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7929 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7933 \begin_layout Standard
7934 This is just the standard
7935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7946 \begin_layout Standard
7951 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7953 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7954 as if you used a typewriter.
7955 \begin_inset Index idx
7958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7959 Paragraph environments|)
7964 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7967 Program Code Listings
7972 \begin_inset space ~
7980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7996 \begin_layout Standard
8001 environment is similar to the
8005 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8006 computer console text.
8011 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8024 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8025 you can have empty lines.
8037 \begin_layout Itemize
8038 have a certain language and a text style
8041 \begin_layout Itemize
8042 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8043 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8047 \begin_layout Standard
8048 Because of these properties
8052 works like a typewriter.
8056 \begin_layout Verbatim
8061 \begin_layout Verbatim
8065 The following 2 lines are empty:
8068 \begin_layout Verbatim
8072 \begin_layout Verbatim
8076 \begin_layout Verbatim
8078 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8083 \begin_layout Section
8084 Nesting Environments
8085 \begin_inset Index idx
8088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8089 Nesting ! Environments
8095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8104 \begin_layout Subsection
8108 \begin_layout Standard
8109 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8111 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8113 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8115 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8127 \begin_layout Enumerate
8131 \begin_layout Enumerate
8136 \begin_layout Enumerate
8140 \begin_layout Enumerate
8145 \begin_layout Enumerate
8149 \begin_layout Standard
8150 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8151 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8153 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8155 \begin_inset space ~
8159 \begin_inset space ~
8167 \begin_inset space ~
8171 \begin_inset space ~
8176 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8178 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8181 arg "depth-increment"
8187 arg "depth-decrement"
8201 arg "depth-increment"
8207 arg "depth-decrement"
8211 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8212 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8216 \begin_layout Standard
8217 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8218 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8219 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8220 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8224 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8225 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8227 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8230 \begin_layout Subsection
8231 What You Can and Can't Nest
8234 \begin_layout Standard
8235 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8236 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8239 \begin_layout Standard
8240 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8241 than a simple yes or no.
8242 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8245 \begin_layout Itemize
8246 Completely unnestable
8249 \begin_layout Itemize
8250 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8254 \begin_layout Itemize
8255 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8259 \begin_layout Standard
8260 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8261 environments have them:
8264 \begin_layout Description
8265 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8266 Can't nest into them.
8270 \begin_layout Itemize
8276 \begin_layout Itemize
8282 \begin_layout Itemize
8288 \begin_layout Itemize
8294 \begin_layout Itemize
8301 \begin_layout Description
8303 \begin_inset space ~
8306 Nestable You can nest them.
8307 You can nest other things into them.
8311 \begin_layout Itemize
8317 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8329 \begin_layout Itemize
8335 \begin_layout Itemize
8341 \begin_layout Itemize
8347 \begin_layout Itemize
8353 \begin_layout Itemize
8359 \begin_layout Itemize
8366 \begin_layout Description
8367 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8368 You can't nest anything into them.
8372 \begin_layout Itemize
8378 \begin_layout Itemize
8384 \begin_layout Itemize
8390 \begin_layout Itemize
8396 \begin_layout Itemize
8402 \begin_layout Itemize
8408 \begin_layout Itemize
8414 \begin_layout Itemize
8420 \begin_layout Itemize
8426 \begin_layout Itemize
8432 \begin_layout Itemize
8438 \begin_layout Itemize
8444 \begin_layout Itemize
8450 \begin_layout Itemize
8454 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_layout Itemize
8467 \begin_layout Standard
8468 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8476 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8486 \begin_inset space ~
8489 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8490 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8491 nested section headings violate this.
8499 \begin_layout Subsection
8500 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8501 \begin_inset Index idx
8504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8505 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8513 \begin_layout Standard
8514 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8515 affected by nesting anyhow.
8519 \begin_layout Itemize
8523 \begin_layout Itemize
8527 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 \begin_layout Standard
8533 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8541 Figures and tables in
8545 are not affected by this.
8550 Have a look at section
8551 \begin_inset space ~
8555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8557 reference "sec:Floats"
8561 for more information about
8568 \begin_layout Standard
8569 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8570 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8574 \begin_layout Standard
8575 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8583 of its own, it behaves just like a
8584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8591 paragraph environment.
8592 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8596 \begin_layout Standard
8597 Here's an example with a table:
8600 \begin_layout Enumerate
8605 \begin_layout Enumerate
8606 This is (a) and it's nested.
8610 \begin_layout Standard
8611 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8617 \begin_layout Standard
8619 \begin_inset Tabular
8620 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8621 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8622 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8623 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8707 \begin_layout Standard
8708 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8715 \begin_layout Enumerate
8717 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8721 \begin_layout Enumerate
8725 \begin_layout Standard
8726 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8729 \begin_layout Enumerate
8734 \begin_layout Enumerate
8735 This is (a) and it's nested.
8739 \begin_layout Standard
8740 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8746 \begin_layout Standard
8748 \begin_inset Tabular
8749 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8750 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8751 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8752 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8836 \begin_layout Standard
8837 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8843 \begin_layout Enumerate
8850 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8853 \begin_layout Enumerate
8857 \begin_layout Standard
8858 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8862 \begin_layout Standard
8863 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8865 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8868 \begin_layout Enumerate
8873 \begin_layout Enumerate
8874 This is (a) and it's nested.
8877 \begin_layout Standard
8878 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8884 \begin_layout Standard
8886 \begin_inset Tabular
8887 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8888 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8889 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8890 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8975 \begin_layout Standard
8976 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8982 \begin_layout Enumerate
8984 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8991 \begin_layout Enumerate
8995 \begin_layout Standard
8996 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9002 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9003 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9007 \begin_layout Subsection
9008 Usage and General Features
9011 \begin_layout Standard
9012 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9021 is the innermost possible depth.
9022 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9025 \begin_layout Enumerate
9026 level #1 – outermost
9030 \begin_layout Enumerate
9035 \begin_layout Enumerate
9040 \begin_layout Enumerate
9045 \begin_layout Itemize
9050 \begin_layout Itemize
9059 \begin_layout Standard
9060 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9061 both of them in the example.
9062 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9072 For example, if we tried to nest another
9077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9084 , we would get errors.
9087 \begin_layout Subsection
9089 \begin_inset Index idx
9092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9101 \begin_layout Standard
9102 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9103 We have several examples of nested environments.
9104 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9108 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9109 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9112 \begin_layout Labeling
9113 \labelwidthstring MMM
9114 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9123 \begin_layout Labeling
9124 \labelwidthstring MMM
9125 #2-a This is level #2.
9126 We created it by using
9129 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9135 arg "depth-increment"
9142 \begin_layout Labeling
9143 \labelwidthstring MMM
9144 #3-a This is level #3.
9145 This time, we just enter
9152 arg "depth-increment"
9156 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9160 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9166 arg "depth-increment"
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9178 environment, nested inside of
9179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9187 So, it's at level #4.
9188 We did this by entering
9191 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9197 arg "depth-increment"
9200 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9205 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9221 \begin_layout Standard
9226 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9229 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9235 \begin_layout Labeling
9236 \labelwidthstring MMM
9237 #4-a This is level #4.
9241 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9244 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9249 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9253 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9258 keep nesting things inside
9259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9270 \begin_layout Labeling
9271 \labelwidthstring MMM
9272 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9277 \begin_layout Labeling
9278 \labelwidthstring MMM
9279 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9280 and this is level #6.
9281 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9285 \begin_layout Labeling
9286 \labelwidthstring MMM
9287 #5-b Back to level #5.
9291 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9297 arg "depth-decrement"
9304 \begin_layout Labeling
9305 \labelwidthstring MMM
9309 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9315 arg "depth-decrement"
9318 , we're back at level #4.
9322 \begin_layout Labeling
9323 \labelwidthstring MMM
9324 #3-b Back to level #3.
9325 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9329 \begin_layout Labeling
9330 \labelwidthstring MMM
9331 #2-b Back to level #2.
9336 \begin_layout Labeling
9337 \labelwidthstring MMM
9338 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9339 After this sentence, we will enter
9343 and change the paragraph environment back to
9350 \begin_layout Standard
9351 We could have also used the
9367 environment in place of the
9372 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9376 Example 2: Inheritance
9379 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9380 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9383 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9392 arg "depth-increment"
9396 \begin_inset Newline newline
9399 which, we will change to the
9407 \begin_layout Enumerate
9412 environment, at level #2.
9415 \begin_layout Enumerate
9416 Notice how the nested
9420 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9424 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9428 \begin_layout Standard
9429 We ended this example by entering
9434 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9438 and reset the nesting depth by using
9441 arg "depth-decrement"
9447 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9448 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9457 \begin_inset Argument 1
9460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9461 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9469 \begin_layout Enumerate
9470 This is level #1, in an
9474 paragraph environment.
9475 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9479 \begin_layout Enumerate
9484 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9490 arg "depth-increment"
9494 Now, what happens if we nest an
9498 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9499 label be? An asterisk?
9503 \begin_layout Itemize
9513 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9514 So, its label is a bullet.
9515 (We got here by using
9518 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9524 arg "depth-increment"
9527 , then changing the environment to
9535 \begin_layout Itemize
9536 Here's level #4, produced using
9539 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9545 arg "depth-increment"
9549 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9554 \begin_layout Enumerate
9555 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9557 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9562 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9566 , because we are in the
9574 environment (that is, it is an
9589 \begin_layout Enumerate
9594 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9595 type of numbering does LyX use?
9598 \begin_layout Enumerate
9599 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9602 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9605 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9608 \begin_layout Enumerate
9612 arg "depth-decrement"
9615 to decrease the depth after the next
9618 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9625 \begin_layout Enumerate
9627 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9631 \begin_layout Enumerate
9633 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9634 numeral as the label.Why?
9637 \begin_layout Enumerate
9638 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9647 Notice, however, that LyX
9651 reset the counter for the label.
9655 \begin_layout Enumerate
9659 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9665 arg "depth-decrement"
9668 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9669 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9670 into the twofold-nested
9678 \begin_layout Enumerate
9679 The same thing happens if we do another
9682 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9688 arg "depth-decrement"
9691 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9694 \begin_layout Standard
9695 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9700 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9714 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9720 The same rule applies for the
9724 environment, as well.
9727 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9728 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9731 \begin_layout Enumerate
9732 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9733 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9734 the same detail with how we did it.
9743 \begin_layout Standard
9751 arg "depth-increment"
9758 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9759 the example in parentheses someplace.
9760 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9761 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9762 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9766 \begin_layout Enumerate
9771 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9776 Now we will add verse.
9777 \begin_inset Newline newline
9780 It will get much worse.
9781 \begin_inset Newline newline
9791 arg "depth-increment"
9802 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9803 \begin_inset Newline newline
9806 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9807 \begin_inset Newline newline
9813 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9826 \begin_layout Standard
9827 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9833 \begin_layout Standard
9835 \begin_inset Tabular
9836 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9837 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9838 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9839 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9928 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9938 arg "depth-increment"
9944 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9950 \begin_inset Newline newline
9958 arg "depth-decrement"
9965 \begin_layout Enumerate
9970 : level #1) This is another item.
9971 Note that selecting a
9975 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9976 3 times to put the table inside the
9984 \begin_layout Quotation
9985 We're now ending the
9989 list and changing to
9994 We're still at level #1.
9995 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9996 The next set of paragraphs is a
9997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10004 We will nest both the
10011 \begin_inset space ~
10016 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10020 for the letter body.
10024 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10027 to preserve the depth.
10028 Remember that you need to use
10031 arg "newline-insert newline"
10034 to create multiple lines inside the
10041 \begin_inset space ~
10051 \begin_layout Right Address
10053 \begin_inset Newline newline
10056 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10057 \begin_inset Newline newline
10063 \begin_layout Address
10065 \begin_inset space ~
10071 \begin_layout Quotation
10072 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10076 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10077 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10078 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10079 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10080 as soon as possible.
10081 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10084 \begin_layout Quotation
10085 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10086 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10087 with your order, along with payment.
10090 \begin_layout Quotation
10091 We thank you again for your patience.
10094 \begin_layout Address
10096 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 \begin_layout Quotation
10104 That ends that example!
10107 \begin_layout Standard
10108 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10109 just a few keystrokes.
10110 We could have easily nested an
10131 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10134 \begin_layout Subsection
10136 \begin_inset Index idx
10139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10140 Nesting ! Separation
10146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10148 name "sub:Separate-Nestings"
10155 \begin_layout Standard
10156 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10158 For example you need two different enumerations:
10161 \begin_layout Enumerate
10166 \begin_layout Enumerate
10171 \begin_layout Enumerate
10175 \begin_layout --Separator--
10179 \begin_layout Itemize
10185 \begin_layout --Separator--
10189 \begin_layout Enumerate
10193 \begin_layout Enumerate
10197 \begin_layout Enumerate
10201 \begin_layout Standard
10202 To tell LyX that there are two lists and not one, set the cursor at the
10203 end of the last item and use the menu
10205 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10206 Start New Parent Environment
10209 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10210 If you use instead the menu
10212 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10213 Start New Environment
10215 a new list will also be created, but in the same nesting level.
10218 \begin_layout Standard
10219 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10223 arg "paragraph-break"
10230 in the pull-down box for environments in LyX's main toolbar.
10233 \begin_layout Section
10234 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10235 \begin_inset Index idx
10238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10247 \begin_layout Standard
10248 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10249 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10250 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10251 be broken at the end of a line.
10252 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10256 \begin_layout Subsection
10258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10260 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10265 \begin_inset Index idx
10268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10277 \begin_layout Standard
10278 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10279 line at that point.
10280 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10283 \begin_layout Quote
10284 Further documentation is given in section
10285 \begin_inset Newline newline
10289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10291 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10299 \begin_layout Standard
10300 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10315 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10324 A protected space is set with
10326 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10327 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10329 \begin_inset space ~
10337 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10343 \begin_layout Subsection
10345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10347 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10352 \begin_inset Index idx
10355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10356 Spacing ! Horizontal
10364 \begin_layout Standard
10365 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10367 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10368 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10372 The length units are listed in Appendix
10373 \begin_inset space ~
10377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10379 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10390 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10395 \begin_inset Index idx
10398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10399 Spaces ! Inter-word
10407 \begin_layout Standard
10408 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10409 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10410 at the ends of sentences.
10411 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10412 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10413 followed by a period; see section
10414 \begin_inset space ~
10418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10420 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10425 To insert a normal space, select
10427 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10428 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10430 \begin_inset space ~
10438 arg "space-insert normal"
10444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10448 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10453 \begin_inset Index idx
10456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10465 \begin_layout Standard
10467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10474 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10483 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10484 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10485 inside abbreviations:
10488 \begin_layout Quote
10490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10494 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10497 \begin_layout Standard
10498 or between values and units.
10499 Compare for example this:
10500 \begin_inset Newline newline
10504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10508 \begin_inset Newline newline
10511 10 kg (normal space
10514 \begin_layout Standard
10515 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10517 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10518 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10520 \begin_inset space ~
10528 arg "space-insert thin"
10534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10538 \begin_layout Standard
10539 You can also insert the following space types:
10542 \begin_layout Description
10544 \begin_inset space ~
10548 \begin_inset space ~
10551 space A line with a
10552 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10556 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10560 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10563 negative thin space between the arrows.
10566 \begin_layout Description
10568 \begin_inset space ~
10572 \begin_inset space ~
10575 space A line with a
10576 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10580 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10584 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10587 negative medium space between the arrows.
10590 \begin_layout Description
10592 \begin_inset space ~
10596 \begin_inset space ~
10599 space A line with a
10600 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10604 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10608 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10611 negative thick space between the arrows.
10614 \begin_layout Description
10616 \begin_inset space ~
10620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10624 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10628 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10632 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10636 \begin_inset space ~
10640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10643 em) space between the arrows.
10646 \begin_layout Description
10648 \begin_inset space ~
10652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10656 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10660 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10664 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10668 \begin_inset space ~
10672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10675 em) space between the arrows.
10678 \begin_layout Description
10680 \begin_inset space ~
10684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10688 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10692 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10696 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10700 \begin_inset space ~
10704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10707 em) space between the arrows.
10710 \begin_layout Description
10712 \begin_inset space ~
10716 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10720 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10725 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10732 cm space between the arrows.
10735 \begin_layout Standard
10737 \begin_inset space ~
10741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10743 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10747 lists the different space sizes.
10750 \begin_layout Standard
10751 \begin_inset Float table
10756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10757 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10762 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10766 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10776 \begin_inset Tabular
10777 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10778 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10779 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10780 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10892 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10896 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11055 \begin_inset Index idx
11058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11067 \begin_layout Standard
11068 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
11069 in a uniform fashion.
11070 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11071 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11072 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11073 equally between themselves.
11076 \begin_layout Standard
11077 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11080 \begin_layout Quote
11082 This is on the left side
11083 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11086 This is on the right
11089 \begin_layout Quote
11092 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11096 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11102 \begin_layout Quote
11105 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11109 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11113 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11119 \begin_layout Standard
11120 That was an example in the
11126 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11130 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11134 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11137 is one in a standard paragraph.
11138 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11142 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11145 \begin_layout Standard
11146 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11149 \begin_inset space ~
11154 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11157 \begin_layout Standard
11159 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11163 \begin_inset space ~
11169 \begin_layout Standard
11171 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11175 \begin_inset space ~
11181 \begin_layout Standard
11183 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11187 \begin_inset space ~
11193 \begin_layout Standard
11195 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11199 \begin_inset space ~
11205 \begin_layout Standard
11207 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11211 \begin_inset space ~
11217 \begin_layout Standard
11219 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11223 \begin_inset space ~
11229 \begin_layout Standard
11230 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11238 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11242 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11243 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11244 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11248 option in the space dialog.
11256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11260 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11265 \begin_inset Index idx
11268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11277 \begin_layout Standard
11278 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11279 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11282 \begin_layout Standard
11283 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11286 What is correct English?:
11287 \begin_inset Newline newline
11291 \begin_inset Newline newline
11295 \begin_inset space ~
11298 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11299 \begin_inset Newline newline
11303 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11314 \begin_inset Newline newline
11318 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11329 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11335 \begin_layout Standard
11337 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11342 \begin_inset space ~
11346 \begin_inset space ~
11350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11354 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11356 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11357 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11361 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11367 \begin_inset space ~
11371 \begin_inset space ~
11375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11378 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11387 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11388 That is why it is named
11389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11397 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11398 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11402 \begin_layout Subsection
11404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11406 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11411 \begin_inset Index idx
11414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11423 \begin_layout Standard
11424 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11426 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11427 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11429 \begin_inset space ~
11435 There you find the following sizes:
11438 \begin_layout Standard
11451 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11456 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11458 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11459 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11461 \begin_inset space ~
11467 \begin_inset Index idx
11470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11471 Document ! Settings
11476 for the paragraph separation.
11477 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11488 \begin_layout Standard
11494 \begin_inset Index idx
11497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11503 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11504 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11509 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11510 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11519 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11528 s are described in section
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11535 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11544 If there are several
11548 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11549 You can therefore use
11553 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11556 \begin_layout Standard
11561 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11562 \begin_inset space ~
11566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11568 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11575 \begin_layout Standard
11576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11586 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11587 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11599 \begin_layout Subsection
11600 Paragraph Alignment
11601 \begin_inset Index idx
11604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11605 Paragraph ! Alignment
11613 \begin_layout Standard
11614 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11616 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11619 dialog (toolbar button
11622 arg "layout-paragraph"
11626 There are five possibilities:
11629 \begin_layout Itemize
11637 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11643 \begin_layout Itemize
11651 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11657 \begin_layout Itemize
11665 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11671 \begin_layout Itemize
11679 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11685 \begin_layout Itemize
11693 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11699 \begin_layout Standard
11700 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11701 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11702 the left and right margins.
11703 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11706 \begin_layout Standard
11708 This paragraph is right aligned,
11711 \begin_layout Standard
11713 this one is centered,
11716 \begin_layout Standard
11718 this one is left aligned.
11721 \begin_layout Subsection
11723 \begin_inset Index idx
11726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11727 Page breaks ! Forced
11733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11735 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11742 \begin_layout Standard
11743 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11744 can force a page break where you want one.
11745 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11746 Only if you use a lot of
11750 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11753 \begin_layout Standard
11754 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11755 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11759 have to change the page breaking.
11762 \begin_layout Standard
11763 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11765 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11767 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11768 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11770 \begin_inset space ~
11776 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11778 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11779 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11781 \begin_inset space ~
11786 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11788 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11789 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11792 \begin_layout Standard
11793 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11794 at the top of a page.
11795 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11796 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11797 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11798 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11802 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11806 to learn more about
11813 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11817 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11822 \begin_inset Index idx
11825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11826 Page breaks ! Clear
11834 \begin_layout Standard
11835 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11836 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11837 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11838 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11839 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11842 \begin_layout Standard
11843 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11845 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11846 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11848 \begin_inset space ~
11854 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11856 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11857 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11859 \begin_inset space ~
11863 \begin_inset space ~
11868 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11869 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11872 \begin_layout Subsection
11874 \begin_inset Index idx
11877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11886 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11893 \begin_layout Standard
11894 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11896 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11898 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11899 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11901 \begin_inset space ~
11905 \begin_inset space ~
11913 arg "newline-insert newline"
11917 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11919 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11920 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11922 \begin_inset space ~
11926 \begin_inset space ~
11934 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11937 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11939 This is useful to avoid
11940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11947 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11950 \begin_layout Standard
11951 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11952 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11953 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11954 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11955 \begin_inset space ~
11959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11961 reference "sec:Quote"
11966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11968 reference "sec:Verse"
11973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11975 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11982 \begin_layout Subsection
11984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11986 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11991 \begin_inset Index idx
11994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12003 \begin_layout Standard
12005 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12016 \begin_layout Standard
12020 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12021 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12023 \begin_inset space ~
12028 you can insert horizontal lines.
12029 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12030 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12031 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12034 \begin_layout Standard
12036 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12047 \begin_layout Section
12048 Characters and Symbols
12051 \begin_layout Standard
12052 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12053 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12054 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12062 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
12066 for information on how this is done.
12069 \begin_layout Standard
12070 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12075 dialog via the menu
12077 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12078 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12085 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12093 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12094 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
12095 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12103 \begin_layout Section
12104 Fonts and Text Styles
12105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12107 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12114 \begin_layout Subsection
12116 \begin_inset Index idx
12119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12128 \begin_layout Standard
12129 There are two types of fonts:
12132 \begin_layout Description
12134 \begin_inset space ~
12138 \begin_inset Index idx
12141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12147 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12152 characters) in the font.
12153 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12154 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12155 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12156 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12157 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12158 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12159 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12160 \begin_inset Newline newline
12163 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12164 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12165 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12166 sizes than at small ones.
12167 \begin_inset Newline newline
12181 \begin_inset space ~
12189 \begin_layout Description
12191 \begin_inset space ~
12195 \begin_inset Index idx
12198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12204 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12205 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12206 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12207 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12208 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12209 image manipulation program.
12210 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12211 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12212 \begin_inset space ~
12215 pixels high up to 34
12216 \begin_inset space ~
12219 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12220 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12221 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12223 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12224 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12225 \begin_inset Newline newline
12228 Bitmap fonts are named
12231 \begin_inset space ~
12236 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12239 \begin_layout Standard
12240 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12241 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12242 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12243 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12244 use scalable fonts.
12247 \begin_layout Standard
12248 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12251 \begin_layout Standard
12252 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12253 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12254 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12255 font to emphasize text, you use an
12256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12264 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12265 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12269 \begin_layout Subsection
12271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12273 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12280 \begin_layout Standard
12281 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12282 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12283 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12285 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12286 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12287 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12288 to a word processor.
12289 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12290 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12291 across different machines.
12292 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12293 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12295 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12297 \begin_inset space ~
12301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12303 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12308 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12309 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12312 \begin_layout Standard
12313 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12314 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12316 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12317 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12318 that is installed on your system.
12319 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12322 \begin_layout Standard
12323 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12331 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12332 es; so you might have to experiment.
12340 \begin_layout Standard
12341 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12349 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12350 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12358 \begin_layout Subsection
12359 Document Font and Font size
12360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12362 name "sub:Document-Font"
12367 \begin_inset Index idx
12370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12377 \begin_inset Index idx
12380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12389 \begin_layout Standard
12390 You can set the document fonts in the
12392 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12396 \begin_inset Index idx
12399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12400 Document ! Settings
12410 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12411 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12414 \begin_inset space ~
12423 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12425 \begin_inset space ~
12428 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12431 \begin_layout Standard
12438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12447 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12448 This requires that you use
12454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12493 as the output format, i.
12494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12498 \begin_inset space \space{}
12501 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12502 \begin_inset space ~
12506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12508 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12513 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12514 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12516 \begin_inset space ~
12519 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12520 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12521 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12523 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12526 \begin_layout Standard
12527 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12532 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12537 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12538 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12545 \begin_inset space ~
12551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12564 European Computer Modern
12567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12574 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12577 \begin_layout Standard
12586 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12587 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12592 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12595 \begin_inset space ~
12600 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12606 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12607 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12610 \begin_layout Itemize
12614 \begin_inset space ~
12619 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12632 \begin_inset space ~
12637 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12641 as the default font.
12642 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12643 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12646 \begin_inset space ~
12659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12660 One difference is improved kerning.
12668 \begin_layout Itemize
12672 \begin_inset space ~
12676 \begin_inset space ~
12681 fonts in (the rare) case that
12684 \begin_inset space ~
12689 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12704 Virtual means that it
12705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12716 -glyphs from other fonts.
12717 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12739 Loading the LaTeX-package
12744 \begin_inset Index idx
12747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12748 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12753 with the document preamble line
12754 \begin_inset Newline newline
12761 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12762 \begin_inset Newline newline
12767 will fix the guillemet problem.
12772 and that accented characters are not
12776 glyph, but built of
12780 characters, the accent and the letter.
12781 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12787 If you search for example for the French word
12788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12795 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12804 and not for the glyph
12805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12819 \begin_layout Itemize
12820 If you do not like the look of
12828 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12839 \begin_inset space ~
12849 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12850 \begin_inset space ~
12853 serif and typewriter fonts,
12857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12858 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12865 \begin_inset space ~
12874 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12879 \begin_inset space \space{}
12887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12891 \begin_inset space \space{}
12897 \begin_inset space ~
12905 \begin_inset space ~
12915 but you can also select your own.
12916 \begin_inset Newline newline
12919 The differences between roman,
12922 \begin_inset space ~
12931 fonts are explained in section
12932 \begin_inset space ~
12936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12938 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12943 \begin_inset Newline newline
12949 \begin_inset space ~
12954 was originally designed for newspapers.
12955 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12956 into the small newspaper columns.
12960 \begin_inset space ~
12965 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12968 \begin_layout Standard
12969 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12982 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12987 depends on the class you are using.
12988 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12991 \begin_layout Standard
12992 Note that the font size is the
12997 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12998 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12999 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13002 \begin_inset space ~
13008 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13009 \begin_inset space ~
13013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13015 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13022 \begin_layout Standard
13026 \begin_inset space ~
13031 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13033 \begin_inset space ~
13036 serif or typewriter.
13041 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13051 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13054 \begin_layout Standard
13063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13072 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13078 \begin_inset Index idx
13081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13082 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
13088 \begin_inset space ~
13092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13094 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
13099 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13100 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13107 \begin_layout Standard
13108 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13110 Use Old Style Figures
13114 Use True Small Caps
13117 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13120 Use Old Style Figures
13122 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13124 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13132 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13136 Use True Small Caps
13138 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13139 of scaled capitals.
13140 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13141 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13144 \begin_layout Standard
13149 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13150 a font to display the script characters.
13154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13155 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13160 \begin_inset Index idx
13163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13164 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13169 So this has no effect for the document language
13183 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13187 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13195 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13199 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13200 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13201 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13203 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13206 dialog, see section
13207 \begin_inset space ~
13211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13213 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13225 \begin_layout Subsection
13229 \begin_layout Standard
13230 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13232 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13233 choose a math font in the dialog
13235 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13239 \begin_inset Index idx
13242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13243 Document ! Settings
13249 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13250 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13251 default font family
13252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13258 \begin_inset space ~
13264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13268 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13269 the document font is available.
13272 \begin_layout Standard
13273 Note that the math font will not be used for
13277 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13283 or by the insertion of the command
13290 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13291 \begin_inset space ~
13295 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13296 while the math characters do not.
13298 \begin_inset space ~
13301 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13304 \begin_inset space ~
13312 \begin_inset space ~
13317 in the document font settings.
13320 \begin_layout Standard
13321 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13322 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13329 \begin_inset space ~
13335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13338 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13346 \begin_inset space ~
13352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13358 \begin_layout Subsection
13359 Using Different Character Styles
13360 \begin_inset Index idx
13363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13370 \begin_inset Index idx
13373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13382 \begin_layout Standard
13383 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13384 certain paragraph environments.
13385 LyX supports two character styles,
13394 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13398 \begin_layout Standard
13403 style, do one of the following:
13406 \begin_layout Itemize
13407 click on the toolbar button
13416 \begin_layout Itemize
13417 use the key binding
13426 \begin_layout Standard
13427 These commands are all toggles.
13432 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13435 \begin_layout Standard
13436 One typically uses the
13440 style for proper names.
13442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13449 is the original author of LyX.
13450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13456 \begin_layout Standard
13457 A more widely used character style is the
13462 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13469 \begin_layout Itemize
13470 clicking on the toolbar button
13479 \begin_layout Itemize
13480 using the keybindings
13489 \begin_layout Standard
13494 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13495 es use a different font.
13498 \begin_layout Standard
13499 We've been using the
13503 style all over the place in this document.
13504 Here's one more example:
13507 \begin_layout Quotation
13510 Do not overuse character styles!
13513 \begin_layout Standard
13514 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13515 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13516 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13517 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13521 \begin_layout Standard
13522 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13530 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13532 \begin_inset space ~
13535 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13541 arg "dialog-show character"
13547 \begin_layout Subsection
13548 Fine-Tuning with the
13553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13555 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13560 \begin_inset Index idx
13563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13572 \begin_layout Standard
13573 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13574 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13575 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13576 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13577 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13578 from ordinary dialog.
13581 \begin_layout Standard
13582 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13583 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13584 \begin_inset Newline newline
13587 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13588 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13591 \begin_layout Standard
13592 To use custom character styles, open the
13594 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13596 \begin_inset space ~
13599 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13602 dialog or press the toolbar button
13605 arg "dialog-show character"
13609 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13610 font property that you can choose.
13611 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13614 \begin_inset space ~
13619 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13624 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13625 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13626 environments all at once.
13629 \begin_layout Standard
13630 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13633 \begin_inset space ~
13645 \begin_layout Labeling
13646 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13660 The possible options are:
13664 \begin_layout Labeling
13665 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13670 This is the Roman font family.
13671 Normally a serif font.
13672 It's also the default family.
13682 \begin_layout Labeling
13683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13687 \begin_inset space ~
13694 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13706 \begin_layout Labeling
13707 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13714 This is the Typewriter font family.
13720 arg "font-typewriter"
13729 \begin_layout Labeling
13730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13735 This corresponds to the print weight.
13740 \begin_layout Labeling
13741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13746 This is the Medium font series.
13747 It's also the default series.
13750 \begin_layout Labeling
13751 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13758 This is the Bold font series.
13771 \begin_layout Labeling
13772 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13777 As the name implies.
13782 \begin_layout Labeling
13783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13788 This is the Upright font shape.
13789 It's also the default shape.
13792 \begin_layout Labeling
13793 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13807 s the Italic font shape
13813 \begin_layout Labeling
13814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13821 This is the Slanted font shape
13823 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13826 \begin_layout Labeling
13827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13831 \begin_inset space ~
13838 This is the Small caps font shape
13845 \begin_layout Labeling
13846 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13851 Alters the text color.
13852 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13856 \begin_inset space ~
13861 , which means that the document default color set in
13863 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13864 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13870 \begin_inset space ~
13875 is used, you can choose between
13908 \begin_inset Index idx
13911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13920 \begin_layout Labeling
13921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13926 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13927 the language of the document.
13928 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13930 \begin_inset Newline newline
13933 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13934 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13935 When using the spell checking (see section
13936 \begin_inset space ~
13940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13942 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13946 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13949 \begin_layout Labeling
13950 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13955 Alters the size of the font.
13956 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13957 proportional to the document font size.
13958 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13959 what you want to do.
13964 \begin_layout Labeling
13965 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13986 arg "font-size tiny"
13992 \begin_layout Labeling
13993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14014 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14020 \begin_layout Labeling
14021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14042 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14048 \begin_layout Labeling
14049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14070 arg "font-size small"
14076 \begin_layout Labeling
14077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14091 It's also the default size.
14095 arg "font-size normal"
14101 \begin_layout Labeling
14102 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14123 arg "font-size large"
14129 \begin_layout Labeling
14130 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14151 arg "font-size larger"
14157 \begin_layout Labeling
14158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14179 arg "font-size largest"
14185 \begin_layout Labeling
14186 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14207 arg "font-size huge"
14213 \begin_layout Labeling
14214 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14235 arg "font-size giant"
14241 \begin_layout Labeling
14242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14247 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14267 arg "font-size increase"
14273 \begin_layout Labeling
14274 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14279 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14299 arg "font-size decrease"
14306 \begin_layout Standard
14311 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14312 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14313 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14314 — use those instead.
14315 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14318 \begin_layout Labeling
14319 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14324 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14329 \begin_layout Labeling
14330 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14337 This is text with emphasize on
14340 This might seem like the same as
14344 , but it is actually a bit different.
14350 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14352 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14355 \begin_layout Labeling
14356 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14363 This is text with Underbar on.
14369 arg "font-underline"
14375 \begin_inset Newline newline
14380 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14381 when you could not change fonts.
14382 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14383 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14387 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14390 \begin_layout Labeling
14391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14395 \begin_inset space ~
14402 This is text with Double underbar on.
14408 arg "font-underunderline"
14412 \begin_inset Newline newline
14415 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14416 about double underbar.
14419 \begin_layout Labeling
14420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14424 \begin_inset space ~
14431 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14437 arg "font-underwave"
14441 \begin_inset Newline newline
14444 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14445 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14448 \begin_layout Labeling
14449 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14456 This is text with Strikeout on.
14462 arg "font-strikeout"
14466 \begin_inset Newline newline
14469 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14470 changed in the meantime.
14473 \begin_layout Labeling
14474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14481 This is text with Noun on.
14488 , this is a logical attribute.
14489 Normally it's equivalent to
14492 \begin_inset space ~
14501 \begin_layout Standard
14502 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14503 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14505 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14507 \begin_inset space ~
14510 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14516 arg "dialog-show character"
14519 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14520 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14523 arg "textstyle-apply"
14527 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14531 \begin_layout Standard
14532 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14539 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14540 (suppose you just set the shape to
14541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14559 \begin_inset space ~
14571 \begin_layout Standard
14572 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14580 \begin_inset space ~
14592 \begin_layout Itemize
14598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14605 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14623 \begin_inset Newline newline
14627 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14641 \begin_inset Note Note
14644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14645 For more on phantoms see section
14646 \begin_inset space ~
14650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14652 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14662 \begin_inset Newline newline
14668 \begin_layout Itemize
14673 fonts use characters with serifs.
14674 These are the small
14675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14682 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14683 The following example shows the difference:
14684 \begin_inset Newline newline
14688 \begin_inset Newline newline
14693 text without serifs
14696 \begin_inset Newline newline
14699 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14700 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14707 \begin_layout Itemize
14712 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14713 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14714 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14717 \begin_layout Standard
14718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14725 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14726 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14729 \begin_inset space ~
14734 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14735 the property to be removed.
14736 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14737 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14738 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14756 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14757 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14765 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14769 \begin_inset space ~
14774 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14785 If you, for example, set
14786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14804 \begin_inset space ~
14809 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14818 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14821 \begin_layout Standard
14822 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14823 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14826 \begin_layout Section
14827 Printing and Previewing
14830 \begin_layout Subsection
14834 \begin_layout Standard
14835 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14836 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14837 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14838 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14839 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14841 Additional Features
14846 \begin_layout Standard
14847 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14848 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14849 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14850 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14851 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14852 This happens in two stages:
14855 \begin_layout Enumerate
14856 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14857 generating a file with the extension,
14858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14872 \begin_layout Enumerate
14873 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14877 file to produce printable output.
14880 \begin_layout Subsection
14881 Output file formats
14882 \begin_inset Index idx
14885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14894 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14902 Simple text (ASCII)
14903 \begin_inset Index idx
14906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14907 File formats ! ASCII
14915 \begin_layout Standard
14916 This file type has the extension
14917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14929 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14933 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14940 \begin_layout Standard
14941 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14943 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14944 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14946 \begin_inset space ~
14952 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14953 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14954 \begin_inset space ~
14958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14960 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14965 If your document includes such material, use
14967 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14968 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14970 \begin_inset space ~
14974 \begin_inset space ~
14978 \begin_inset space ~
14986 \begin_inset space ~
14990 \begin_inset space ~
14996 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14997 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15002 \begin_inset Index idx
15005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15006 File formats ! LaTeX
15014 \begin_layout Standard
15015 This file type has the extension
15016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15027 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
15029 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
15030 it manually with console commands.
15031 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
15032 you view or export your document.
15035 \begin_layout Standard
15036 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
15038 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15039 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15054 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
15055 \begin_inset space ~
15059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15061 reference "sub:Export"
15068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15070 \begin_inset Index idx
15073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15082 \begin_layout Standard
15083 This file type has the extension
15084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15104 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15105 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15106 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15110 \begin_layout Standard
15111 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15112 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15113 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15114 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15115 when you view the DVI.
15116 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15119 \begin_layout Standard
15120 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15122 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15123 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15128 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15129 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15131 \begin_inset space ~
15138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15148 The latter option uses the program
15157 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15158 font access (see section
15159 \begin_inset space ~
15163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15165 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15170 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15171 standard TeX processor.
15174 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15176 \begin_inset Index idx
15179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15180 File formats ! PostScript
15188 \begin_layout Standard
15189 This file type has the extension
15190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15202 PostScript was developed by the company
15206 as a printer language.
15207 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15209 PostScript can be seen as a
15210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15213 programming language
15214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15217 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15222 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15228 \begin_inset Index idx
15231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15232 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15242 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15245 \begin_layout Standard
15246 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15250 Encapsulated PostScript
15251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15254 (EPS, file extension
15255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15267 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15268 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15269 If, for example, you have 50
15270 \begin_inset space ~
15273 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15274 \begin_inset space ~
15277 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15278 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15279 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15280 EPS to avoid this problem.
15283 \begin_layout Standard
15284 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15286 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15287 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15293 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15295 \begin_inset Index idx
15298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15305 \begin_inset Index idx
15308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15317 \begin_layout Standard
15318 This file type has the extension
15319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15335 Portable Document Format
15336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15343 was derived from PostScript.
15344 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15353 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15354 looks exactly the same.
15357 \begin_layout Standard
15358 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15362 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15366 (JPG, file extension
15367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15394 Portable Network Graphics
15395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15398 (PNG, file extension
15399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15411 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15412 background to one of these formats.
15413 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15414 will slow down your workflow.
15415 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15418 \begin_layout Standard
15419 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15421 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15427 \begin_layout Description
15429 \begin_inset space ~
15432 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15436 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15439 \begin_layout Description
15441 \begin_inset space ~
15448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15455 X) This uses the program
15459 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15464 is a new engine, derived from
15468 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15469 access (see section
15470 \begin_inset space ~
15474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15476 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15481 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15482 standard TeX processor.
15485 \begin_layout Description
15487 \begin_inset space ~
15494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15501 X) This uses the program
15505 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15510 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15511 font access (see section
15512 \begin_inset space ~
15516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15518 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15523 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15524 vertically written Japanese.
15527 \begin_layout Description
15529 \begin_inset space ~
15532 (cropped) This is the same as
15535 \begin_inset space ~
15540 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15541 This is for example useful if you want to use LyX to generate good-looking
15542 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15545 \begin_layout Description
15547 \begin_inset space ~
15550 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15554 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15558 \begin_layout Description
15560 \begin_inset space ~
15563 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15567 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15568 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15572 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15573 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15576 \begin_layout Standard
15580 \begin_inset space ~
15589 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15590 works without problems.
15591 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15592 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15596 \begin_inset space ~
15603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15615 \begin_inset space ~
15622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15631 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15639 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15641 \begin_inset Index idx
15644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15645 FileFormats ! XHTML
15651 \begin_inset Index idx
15654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15663 \begin_layout Standard
15664 This file type has the extension
15665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15677 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15678 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15679 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15680 suitable for the purpose.
15681 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15683 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15684 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15687 between different formats, which are described in section
15689 Math Output in XHTML
15694 \begin_inset space ~
15702 \begin_layout Standard
15703 XHTML output remains
15704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15711 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15714 LyX and the World Wide Web
15718 Additional Features
15720 manual, for more information.
15723 \begin_layout Standard
15724 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15726 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15727 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15733 \begin_layout Subsection
15735 \begin_inset Index idx
15738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15747 \begin_layout Standard
15748 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15749 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15758 or use the toolbar button
15765 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15766 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15773 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15777 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15785 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15790 Further output formats can be selected via
15792 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15793 View (Other Formats)
15795 or the toolbar button
15796 \begin_inset Graphics
15797 filename ../images/view-others.png
15799 groupId toolbarbuttons
15806 \begin_layout Standard
15807 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15808 viewer window using the menu
15810 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15815 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15816 Update (Other Formats)
15821 \begin_layout Standard
15822 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15824 To have a real output, export your document.
15827 \begin_layout Subsection
15828 Printing the File from within LyX
15829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15831 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15838 \begin_layout Standard
15839 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15840 it directly from within LyX.
15841 To print a file, select the menu
15843 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15849 arg "dialog-show print"
15852 ) or click on the toolbar button
15855 arg "dialog-show print"
15859 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15860 This file is then processed by the program
15864 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15869 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15872 \begin_layout Standard
15873 You can set the following print parameters in the
15876 \begin_inset space ~
15884 \begin_layout Labeling
15885 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15890 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15895 Note that this printer name is for the program
15904 has to be configured for this printer name.
15905 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15906 \begin_inset space ~
15910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15912 reference "sub:Printer"
15921 The printer should understand PostScript.
15924 \begin_layout Labeling
15925 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15930 The name of a file to print to.
15931 The output will be a PostScript file.
15932 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15936 \begin_layout Standard
15937 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15938 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15939 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15940 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15941 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15942 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15943 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15946 \begin_layout Section
15947 A few Words about Typography
15948 \begin_inset Index idx
15951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15960 \begin_layout Subsection
15961 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15962 \begin_inset Index idx
15965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15972 \begin_inset Index idx
15975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15984 \begin_layout Standard
15986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15997 character comes in four lengths: the
16009 , and the minus sign:
16010 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16016 \begin_layout Standard
16017 \begin_inset Tabular
16018 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16019 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16020 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16021 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16022 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16023 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16052 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16092 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16117 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16119 \begin_inset space ~
16122 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16129 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16154 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16156 \begin_inset space ~
16159 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16180 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16214 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16220 \begin_layout Standard
16221 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16233 character multiple times in a row.
16234 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16235 the final output, but not in LyX.
16237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16267 \begin_layout Standard
16268 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16269 math mode and has a length of its own.
16270 Here are some examples:
16273 \begin_layout Enumerate
16274 line- and page-breaks
16275 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16285 \begin_layout Enumerate
16287 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16297 \begin_layout Enumerate
16298 Oh — there's a dash.
16299 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16309 \begin_layout Enumerate
16310 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16314 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16324 \begin_layout Subsection
16326 \begin_inset Index idx
16329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16338 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16345 \begin_layout Standard
16346 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16347 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16352 \begin_inset Index idx
16355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16356 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16361 following the rules of the document language.
16364 \begin_layout Standard
16365 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16370 font and with unusual constructs, like
16371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16379 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16381 This is done with the menu
16383 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16384 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16386 \begin_inset space ~
16392 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16393 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16396 \begin_layout Standard
16397 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16398 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16408 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16416 as a hyphenation possibility.
16417 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16418 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16419 as described in section
16420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16423 Prevent Hyphenation
16424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16430 \begin_inset space ~
16438 \begin_layout Subsection
16440 \begin_inset Index idx
16443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16452 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16453 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16456 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16463 \begin_layout Standard
16464 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16465 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16466 LaTeX then adds the
16467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16470 appropriate amount of space.
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16474 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16476 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16477 gets after another word.
16480 \begin_layout Standard
16481 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16482 not work in all cases.
16484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16496 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16499 \begin_layout Standard
16500 Here are some examples of
16504 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16507 \begin_layout Itemize
16512 \begin_layout Itemize
16517 \begin_layout Standard
16518 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16521 \begin_layout Itemize
16523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16527 this is too much space!
16530 \begin_layout Itemize
16535 \begin_layout Standard
16536 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16539 \begin_layout Standard
16540 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16543 \begin_layout Enumerate
16547 \begin_inset space ~
16552 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16553 \begin_inset space ~
16557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16559 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16564 \begin_inset Index idx
16567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16568 Spaces ! inter-word
16576 \begin_layout Enumerate
16580 \begin_inset space ~
16585 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16586 \begin_inset space ~
16590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16592 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16597 \begin_inset Index idx
16600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16609 \begin_layout Enumerate
16613 \begin_inset space ~
16617 \begin_inset space ~
16621 \begin_inset space ~
16628 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16630 \begin_inset space ~
16635 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16636 This function is also bound to
16639 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16645 \begin_layout Standard
16646 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16649 \begin_layout Itemize
16651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16655 \begin_inset space \space{}
16658 this is too much space!
16661 \begin_layout Itemize
16662 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16666 \begin_layout Standard
16667 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16668 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16669 will take care of this.
16672 \begin_layout Standard
16673 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16677 \begin_inset space ~
16682 feature described in the section
16688 Additional Features
16693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16695 \begin_inset Index idx
16698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16699 Typography ! Quotes
16705 \begin_inset Index idx
16708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16739 \begin_layout Standard
16740 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16741 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16742 and use a closing quote at the end.
16744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16752 The keyboard character,
16756 , generates this automatically.
16759 \begin_layout Standard
16760 You can specify what character the
16764 key produces using the submenu
16770 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16774 \begin_inset Index idx
16777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16778 Document ! Settings
16788 There are six choices:
16791 \begin_layout Labeling
16792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16815 \begin_layout Labeling
16816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16819 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16823 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16829 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16833 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16839 \begin_layout Labeling
16840 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16843 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16847 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16853 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16857 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16863 \begin_layout Labeling
16864 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16867 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16871 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16877 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16881 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16887 \begin_layout Labeling
16888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16891 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16895 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16901 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16905 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16911 \begin_layout Labeling
16912 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16915 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16919 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16925 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16929 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16935 \begin_layout Standard
16936 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16939 arg "quote-insert single"
16945 \begin_layout Subsection
16947 \begin_inset Index idx
16950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16951 Typography ! Ligatures
16957 \begin_inset Index idx
16960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16991 name "sub:Ligatures"
16998 \begin_layout Standard
16999 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17000 print them as single characters.
17001 These groups are known as
17006 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
17008 Here are the standard ligatures:
17011 \begin_layout Itemize
17015 \begin_layout Itemize
17019 \begin_layout Itemize
17023 \begin_layout Itemize
17027 \begin_layout Itemize
17031 \begin_layout Standard
17032 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17035 \begin_layout Standard
17036 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17037 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17045 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17061 To break a ligature, use
17063 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17064 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17066 \begin_inset space ~
17073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17084 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17101 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17109 \begin_layout Subsection
17111 \begin_inset Index idx
17114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17123 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17130 \begin_layout Standard
17131 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
17132 characters in different sizes and positions.
17133 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
17134 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
17135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17154 \begin_inset Note Note
17157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17158 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17159 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17164 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17165 following proper names:
17168 \begin_layout Description
17169 LyX The name of the game, write
17170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17191 \begin_layout Description
17192 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17214 \begin_layout Description
17215 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17237 \begin_layout Description
17238 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17260 \begin_layout Standard
17261 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17266 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17274 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17275 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17276 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17279 : The actual version is
17280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17287 , the previous one was
17288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17298 \begin_layout Standard
17299 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17300 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17301 In LyX this will look like
17302 \begin_inset Graphics
17303 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17309 \begin_inset Newline newline
17312 For more about TeX Code, see section
17313 \begin_inset space ~
17317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17319 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17326 \begin_layout Subsection
17328 \begin_inset Index idx
17331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17340 \begin_layout Standard
17341 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17342 space between two words.
17343 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17353 for units use the menu
17355 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17356 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17358 \begin_inset space ~
17366 arg "space-insert thin"
17372 \begin_layout Standard
17373 Here is an example to show the differences:
17376 \begin_layout Standard
17377 \begin_inset Tabular
17378 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17379 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17380 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17381 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17388 \begin_inset space ~
17392 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17404 space between number and unit
17411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17420 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17432 half space between number and unit
17445 \begin_layout Subsection
17447 \begin_inset Index idx
17450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17451 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17459 \begin_layout Standard
17460 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17462 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17463 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17464 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17465 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17466 These bits of text became known as
17477 \begin_layout Standard
17478 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17479 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17480 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17481 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17482 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17483 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17484 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17485 \begin_inset Newline newline
17493 \begin_inset Newline newline
17501 \begin_inset Newline newline
17504 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17505 Some LaTeX books (such as
17506 \begin_inset space ~
17510 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17512 key "latexcompanion"
17517 \begin_inset space ~
17521 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17527 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17531 \begin_layout Chapter
17532 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17535 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17542 \begin_layout Standard
17543 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17546 \begin_inset space ~
17552 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17555 \begin_layout Section
17557 \begin_inset Index idx
17560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17576 \begin_layout Standard
17577 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17580 \begin_layout Description
17582 \begin_inset space ~
17585 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17586 \begin_inset Newline newline
17590 \begin_inset Note Note
17593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17594 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17602 \begin_layout Description
17603 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17604 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17606 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17607 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17620 \begin_inset space ~
17626 \begin_inset Newline newline
17630 \begin_inset Note Comment
17633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17634 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17642 \begin_layout Description
17644 \begin_inset space ~
17647 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17648 set in the document settings under
17650 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17652 \begin_inset space ~
17658 \begin_inset Newline newline
17662 \begin_inset Newline newline
17666 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17675 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17676 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17681 of a comment that appears in the output.
17687 \begin_inset Newline newline
17691 \begin_inset Newline newline
17694 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17697 \begin_layout Standard
17698 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17706 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17710 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17713 \begin_layout Section
17715 \begin_inset Index idx
17718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17727 name "sec:Footnotes"
17734 \begin_layout Standard
17735 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17738 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17741 or the toolbar button
17744 arg "footnote-insert"
17756 \begin_inset Graphics
17757 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17766 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17795 label, the box will
17799 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17800 Clicking on the box label again will close
17813 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17814 and click on the footnote
17829 \begin_layout Standard
17830 Here is an example footnote:
17838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17839 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17847 \begin_layout Standard
17848 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17849 position where the footnote box is placed.
17850 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17851 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17852 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17853 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17858 ey are described in the
17861 \begin_inset space ~
17869 \begin_layout Section
17871 \begin_inset Index idx
17874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17883 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17890 \begin_layout Standard
17891 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17892 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17894 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17896 \begin_inset space ~
17901 or the toolbar button
17904 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17930 appearing within your text.
17931 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17940 \begin_layout Standard
17941 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17945 \begin_inset Marginal
17948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17950 This is a marginal note.
17958 \begin_layout Standard
17959 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17960 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17961 pages, right on odd pages.
17964 \begin_layout Standard
17965 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17968 \begin_inset space ~
17976 \begin_inset space ~
17984 \begin_layout Section
17985 Graphics and Images
17986 \begin_inset Index idx
17989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17996 \begin_inset Index idx
17999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18008 name "sec:Graphics"
18015 \begin_layout Standard
18016 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18017 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18020 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18025 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18029 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18032 \begin_layout Standard
18033 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18038 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18039 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18041 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18042 \begin_inset space ~
18046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18048 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18055 \begin_layout Standard
18060 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18061 of the image in the output.
18062 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18066 \begin_inset space ~
18070 \begin_inset space ~
18079 \begin_inset space ~
18083 \begin_inset space ~
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18092 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18093 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18101 \begin_layout Standard
18108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18116 \begin_inset space ~
18120 \begin_inset space ~
18127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18136 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
18137 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18141 \begin_inset space ~
18146 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18147 with the image size is printed.
18151 \begin_inset space ~
18155 \begin_inset space ~
18159 \begin_inset space ~
18164 is explained in the
18167 \begin_inset space ~
18179 \begin_layout Standard
18180 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18181 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18183 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18186 \begin_layout Standard
18188 \begin_inset Graphics
18189 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18197 \begin_layout Standard
18198 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18199 the image into a float, see section
18200 \begin_inset space ~
18204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18206 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18213 \begin_layout Subsection
18215 \begin_inset Index idx
18218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18227 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18234 \begin_layout Standard
18235 You can insert images in any known file format.
18236 But as we explained in section
18237 \begin_inset space ~
18241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18243 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18247 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18248 LyX therefore uses the program
18252 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18253 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18254 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18255 \begin_inset space ~
18259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18261 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18268 \begin_layout Standard
18269 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18272 \begin_layout Description
18274 \begin_inset space ~
18277 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18278 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18279 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18283 Graphics Interchange Format
18284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18287 (GIF, file extension
18288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18300 \begin_inset Index idx
18303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18335 Portable Network Graphics
18336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18339 (PNG, file extension
18340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18352 \begin_inset Index idx
18355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18387 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18391 (JPG, file extension
18392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18416 \begin_inset Index idx
18419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18450 \begin_layout Description
18452 \begin_inset space ~
18455 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18457 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18458 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18459 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18460 \begin_inset Newline newline
18463 Scalable image formats can be
18464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18467 Scalable Vector Graphics
18468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18471 (SVG, file extension
18472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18484 \begin_inset Index idx
18487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18519 Encapsulated PostScript
18520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18523 (EPS, file extension
18524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18536 \begin_inset Index idx
18539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18571 Portable Document Format
18572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18575 (PDF, file extension
18576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18588 \begin_inset Index idx
18591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18606 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18607 result will not be scalable.
18608 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18614 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18622 \begin_layout Standard
18623 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18630 \begin_layout Subsection
18631 Grouping of Image Settings
18632 \begin_inset Index idx
18635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18636 Images ! Settings grouping
18644 \begin_layout Standard
18645 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18647 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18648 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18650 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18651 need to manually change each of them.
18655 \begin_layout Standard
18656 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18659 \begin_inset space ~
18663 \begin_inset space ~
18678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18686 \begin_inset space ~
18690 \begin_inset space ~
18697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18707 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18708 and checking the name of the desired group.
18711 \begin_layout Section
18713 \begin_inset Index idx
18716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18732 \begin_layout Standard
18733 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18736 arg "tabular-insert"
18741 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18745 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18746 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18747 from the rest of the table.
18748 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18749 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18751 Here is an example table:
18754 \begin_layout Standard
18756 \begin_inset Tabular
18757 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18758 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18759 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18760 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18761 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18762 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18962 \begin_layout Subsection
18966 \begin_layout Standard
18967 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18970 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18974 This brings up the table dialog.
18975 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18976 cursor is placed currently.
18977 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18978 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18979 done on all of your selection.
18982 \begin_layout Standard
18983 In addition to the table dialog, the
18986 \begin_inset space ~
18991 helps you in setting table properties.
18992 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18995 \begin_layout Standard
18999 \begin_inset space ~
19004 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19005 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19006 current cell respectively.
19007 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19009 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19010 of text, see section
19011 \begin_inset space ~
19015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19017 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
19024 \begin_layout Standard
19025 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19026 using the check box
19035 This will merge the cells to
19039 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19040 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19041 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19042 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19043 in the last row without the upper border:
19046 \begin_layout Standard
19048 \begin_inset Tabular
19049 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19050 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19051 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19052 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19053 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19054 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19065 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19074 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19150 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19185 \begin_layout Standard
19186 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19187 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19188 explained in the chapter
19195 \begin_inset space ~
19201 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19202 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19205 \begin_layout Standard
19206 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19214 Most DVI-viewers are
19218 able to display rotations.
19226 \begin_layout Standard
19231 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19236 adds lines for all cell borders.
19239 \begin_layout Subsection
19241 \begin_inset Index idx
19244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19245 Tables ! Longtables
19251 \begin_inset Index idx
19254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19263 \begin_layout Standard
19264 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19267 \begin_inset space ~
19271 \begin_inset space ~
19280 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19281 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19284 \begin_layout Description
19289 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19290 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19291 except for the first page, if
19294 \begin_inset space ~
19302 \begin_layout Description
19306 \begin_inset space ~
19311 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19312 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19315 \begin_layout Description
19320 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19321 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19322 except for the last page, if
19325 \begin_inset space ~
19333 \begin_layout Description
19337 \begin_inset space ~
19342 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19343 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19346 \begin_layout Description
19347 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19348 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19350 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19354 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19357 \begin_inset space ~
19365 \begin_layout Standard
19366 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19367 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19368 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19374 In this context, first means first in this order:
19377 \begin_inset space ~
19389 \begin_inset space ~
19394 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19397 \begin_layout Standard
19399 \begin_inset Tabular
19400 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19401 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19402 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19403 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19404 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19405 <row endfirsthead="true">
19406 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19412 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19417 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19426 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19436 <row endfirsthead="true">
19437 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19448 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19469 <row endhead="true">
19470 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19490 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19500 <row endhead="true">
19501 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19512 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 <row endfoot="true">
19534 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19554 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20526 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20544 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20648 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20710 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20741 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20772 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20834 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20865 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20927 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20958 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21051 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21113 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21144 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21423 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21485 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <row endlastfoot="true">
21516 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21527 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21536 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 \begin_layout Subsection
21555 \begin_inset Index idx
21558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21567 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21574 \begin_layout Standard
21575 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21576 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21577 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21578 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21582 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21585 \begin_layout Standard
21586 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21587 for the column in the table dialog.
21588 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21589 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21593 \begin_layout Standard
21595 \begin_inset Tabular
21596 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21597 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21598 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21599 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21600 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21689 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 This is longer now.
21750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21802 This is longer now.
21807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21833 \begin_layout Standard
21834 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21835 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21841 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21847 Selection with the mouse or with
21851 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21852 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21853 the selection from outside the table.
21856 \begin_layout Section
21858 \begin_inset Index idx
21861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21877 \begin_layout Subsection
21881 \begin_layout Standard
21882 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21883 have a fixed location.
21885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21892 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21900 \begin_inset space ~
21905 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21906 too many notes on the current page.
21909 \begin_layout Standard
21910 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21911 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21912 and pages without text.
21913 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21914 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21915 Floats are therefore numbered.
21916 Referencing is described in section
21917 \begin_inset space ~
21921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21923 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21930 \begin_layout Standard
21931 To insert a float, use the menu
21933 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21937 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21938 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21940 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21941 \begin_inset Index idx
21944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21951 paragraph within the float.
21952 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21953 by left-clicking on the box label.
21954 A closed float box looks like this:
21955 \begin_inset Graphics
21956 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21961 – a gray button with a red label.
21964 \begin_layout Standard
21965 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21966 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21969 \begin_layout Subsection
21971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21973 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21978 \begin_inset Index idx
21981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21982 Floats ! Figure floats
21990 \begin_layout Standard
21992 \begin_inset space ~
21996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21998 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22002 was created using the menu
22004 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22005 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22011 arg "float-insert figure"
22015 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22018 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22024 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22028 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22029 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22031 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22033 \begin_inset space ~
22041 arg "layout-paragraph"
22047 \begin_layout Standard
22048 \begin_inset Float figure
22053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 \begin_inset Graphics
22056 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22071 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22075 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22088 \begin_layout Standard
22089 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22090 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22092 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22101 ) and refer to it using the menu
22103 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22109 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22113 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22114 vague references like
22115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22122 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
22124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22132 For more about cross-references, see section
22133 \begin_inset space ~
22137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22139 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22146 \begin_layout Standard
22147 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22148 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22149 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22150 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22151 as described in section
22152 \begin_inset space ~
22156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22158 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22164 \begin_inset space ~
22168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22170 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22174 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22175 You can also set the images one below the other.
22177 \begin_inset space ~
22181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22183 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22190 reference "fig:Platypus"
22194 are the subfigures.
22197 \begin_layout Standard
22198 \begin_inset Float figure
22203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22204 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22208 \begin_inset Float figure
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22219 name "fig:Undefinable"
22231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 \begin_inset Graphics
22233 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22244 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22248 \begin_inset Float figure
22253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22254 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22259 name "fig:Platypus"
22271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 \begin_inset Graphics
22273 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22285 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22297 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22301 Two distorted images.
22314 \begin_layout Subsection
22316 \begin_inset Index idx
22319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22320 Floats ! Table floats
22328 \begin_layout Standard
22329 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22331 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22332 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22335 or the toolbar button
22338 arg "float-insert table"
22342 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22343 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22344 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22346 \begin_inset space ~
22350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22352 reference "tab:Table-float"
22359 \begin_layout Standard
22360 \begin_inset Float table
22365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22371 name "tab:Table-float"
22383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22385 \begin_inset Tabular
22386 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22387 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22388 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22389 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22390 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22538 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22541 \end{array}\right]$
22549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22583 \begin_layout Subsection
22585 \begin_inset Index idx
22588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 \begin_layout Standard
22598 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22599 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22600 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22602 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22610 \begin_inset space ~
22618 \begin_layout Section
22620 \begin_inset Index idx
22623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22632 \begin_layout Standard
22633 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22635 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22636 \begin_inset space \space{}
22643 \begin_layout Standard
22644 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22646 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22650 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22651 and its alignment within the page.
22654 \begin_layout Standard
22656 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22666 height_special "totalheight"
22669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 This is a minipage.
22673 The text is set in an italic style.
22676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22680 another formatting.
22688 \begin_layout Standard
22689 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22692 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22696 as described in section
22697 \begin_inset space ~
22701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22703 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22708 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22714 \begin_layout Standard
22715 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22725 height_special "totalheight"
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22729 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22730 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22736 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22740 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22750 height_special "totalheight"
22753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22754 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22755 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22763 \begin_layout Standard
22764 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22770 \begin_layout Standard
22771 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22773 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22780 \begin_inset space ~
22788 \begin_layout Chapter
22789 Mathematical Formulas
22790 \begin_inset Index idx
22793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22800 \begin_inset Index idx
22803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22834 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22841 \begin_layout Standard
22842 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22847 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22850 \begin_layout Section
22852 \begin_inset Index idx
22855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22864 \begin_layout Standard
22865 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22878 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22880 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22881 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22882 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22884 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22890 \begin_layout Standard
22891 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22895 \begin_inset space ~
22900 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22903 \begin_layout Standard
22904 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22905 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22908 \begin_layout Standard
22909 This is a line with an inline formula
22910 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22916 \begin_layout Standard
22917 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22918 paragraph, like this one:
22919 \begin_inset Formula
22926 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22929 \begin_layout Standard
22930 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22931 For example, typing
22932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22945 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22946 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22950 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22953 \begin_inset space ~
22961 \begin_layout Subsection
22962 Navigating in Formulas
22963 \begin_inset Index idx
22966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22975 \begin_layout Standard
22976 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22977 achieved with the arrow keys.
22978 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22979 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22984 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22985 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22989 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22993 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22996 \end{array}\right]$
23004 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23009 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23010 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23013 \begin_layout Standard
23018 , printed in this document as
23019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23023 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23030 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23031 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23032 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23037 For example, if you want
23038 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23046 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23056 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23060 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23065 , since in the latter case only the
23068 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23073 will be under the square root sign:
23074 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23080 \begin_layout Standard
23081 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23083 \begin_inset Formula
23085 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23094 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23095 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23098 \begin_layout Subsection
23102 \begin_layout Standard
23103 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23104 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23108 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23109 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23110 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23111 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23112 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
23115 \begin_layout Subsection
23116 Exponents and Subscripts
23117 \begin_inset Index idx
23120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23127 \begin_inset Index idx
23130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23139 \begin_layout Standard
23140 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23143 arg "math-superscript"
23149 arg "math-subscript"
23152 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23154 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23157 , type in a formula
23160 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23170 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23176 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23180 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23186 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23192 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23201 , you have to use an extra
23205 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23206 For example, if you want
23207 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23213 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23219 Subscripts are similar: To get
23220 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23226 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23234 \begin_layout Subsection
23236 \begin_inset Index idx
23239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23248 \begin_layout Standard
23249 Create a fraction either with the command
23255 or by using the icon
23258 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23264 \begin_inset space ~
23270 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23271 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23272 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23277 To move back up, press
23282 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23283 \begin_inset Formula
23285 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23288 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23296 \begin_layout Subsection
23298 \begin_inset Index idx
23301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23310 \begin_layout Standard
23311 Roots can be created using the
23314 \begin_inset space ~
23322 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23328 arg "math-insert \\root"
23350 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23356 always produces a square root.
23359 \begin_layout Subsection
23360 Operators with Limits
23361 \begin_inset Index idx
23364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23371 \begin_inset Index idx
23374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23383 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23390 \begin_layout Standard
23392 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23396 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23399 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23400 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23401 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23402 The sum operator will automatically place its
23403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23410 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23412 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23416 \begin_inset Formula
23418 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23423 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23427 \begin_layout Standard
23428 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23430 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23431 behind the operator and using the menu
23433 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23434 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23436 \begin_inset space ~
23440 \begin_inset space ~
23454 \begin_layout Standard
23455 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23464 \begin_inset Index idx
23467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 \begin_inset Formula
23476 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23481 which will place the
23482 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23494 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23495 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23501 \begin_layout Standard
23502 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23509 Have a look at section
23510 \begin_inset space ~
23514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23516 reference "sub:Functions"
23520 for an explanation of function macros.
23523 \begin_layout Subsection
23525 \begin_inset Index idx
23528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23537 \begin_layout Standard
23538 Most math symbols can be found in the
23541 \begin_inset space ~
23546 under one of several categories; including
23563 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23567 \begin_layout Standard
23568 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23569 you don't have to use the
23572 \begin_inset space ~
23577 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23578 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23581 \begin_layout Subsection
23583 \begin_inset Index idx
23586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23595 \begin_layout Standard
23596 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23601 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23607 \begin_inset space ~
23615 arg "math-insert \\space"
23619 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23620 For example, the sequence
23625 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23629 \begin_inset Graphics
23630 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23635 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23636 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23637 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23638 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23640 Here are two examples:
23643 \begin_layout Standard
23653 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23659 \begin_layout Standard
23669 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23675 \begin_layout Subsection
23677 \begin_inset Index idx
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23689 name "sub:Functions"
23696 \begin_layout Standard
23700 \begin_inset space ~
23705 contains under the button
23708 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23711 a number of function macros, such as
23712 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23716 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23724 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23731 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23732 avoid confusions, because
23733 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23737 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23743 \begin_layout Standard
23744 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23746 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23750 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23756 \begin_layout Standard
23757 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23758 are placed, as described in section
23759 \begin_inset space ~
23763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23765 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23772 \begin_layout Subsection
23774 \begin_inset Index idx
23777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23786 \begin_layout Standard
23787 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23789 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23790 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23791 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23794 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23795 Our example is entered by typing
23800 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23807 \begin_inset space ~
23811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23813 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23817 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23820 \begin_layout Standard
23821 \begin_inset Float table
23826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23827 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23832 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23836 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 \begin_inset Tabular
23847 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23848 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23849 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23850 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23851 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23935 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24367 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24412 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24433 \begin_layout Standard
24434 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24437 \begin_inset space ~
24445 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24448 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24452 \begin_layout Section
24453 Brackets and Delimiters
24454 \begin_inset Index idx
24457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 \begin_inset Index idx
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24476 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24483 \begin_layout Standard
24484 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24485 For some purposes, using just the keys
24490 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24491 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24492 toolbar delimiter icon
24495 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24499 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24500 \begin_inset Formula
24502 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24510 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24511 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24515 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24518 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24524 \begin_inset Formula
24526 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24534 \begin_layout Standard
24535 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24536 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24540 \begin_layout Standard
24541 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24542 left side and right side.
24543 If you use the option
24546 \begin_inset space ~
24551 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24552 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24553 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24558 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24561 \begin_layout Standard
24562 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24563 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24564 is to go inside the brackets.
24565 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24570 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24571 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24572 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24576 arg "math-delim ( )"
24582 \begin_layout Section
24583 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24584 \begin_inset Index idx
24587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24594 \begin_inset Index idx
24597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24604 \begin_inset Index idx
24607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24608 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24616 \begin_layout Standard
24617 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24620 \begin_inset space ~
24628 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24632 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24633 Here is an example:
24634 \begin_inset Formula
24636 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24645 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24646 \begin_inset space ~
24650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24652 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24657 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24658 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24659 This alignment is set in the box
24664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24712 for every column as default.
24713 For example, the sequence
24714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24725 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24726 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24727 corresponds to the relevant column.
24728 The result will look like this:
24729 \begin_inset Formula
24732 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24733 column & has & has\,right\\
24734 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24743 \begin_layout Standard
24744 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24747 arg "newline-insert newline"
24750 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24751 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24753 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24756 or the math toolbar.
24759 \begin_layout Standard
24760 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24761 It can be created with the menu
24763 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24764 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24766 \begin_inset space ~
24778 Here is an example:
24779 \begin_inset Formula
24793 \begin_layout Standard
24794 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24797 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24800 arg "newline-insert newline"
24804 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24809 arg "newline-insert newline"
24812 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24820 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24821 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24822 A new row is created by every further entry of
24825 arg "newline-insert newline"
24829 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24830 Here is an example:
24831 \begin_inset Formula
24833 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24834 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24839 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24840 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24841 \begin_inset Formula
24843 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24851 \begin_layout Standard
24852 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24859 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24860 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24863 reference "eq:asquared"
24868 The other types are described in section
24869 \begin_inset space ~
24873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24875 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24882 \begin_layout Section
24883 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24884 \begin_inset Index idx
24887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24888 Math ! Formula numbering
24894 \begin_inset Index idx
24897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24898 Math ! Referencing formulas
24904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24906 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24913 \begin_layout Standard
24914 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24916 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24917 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24919 \begin_inset space ~
24923 \begin_inset space ~
24931 arg "math-number-toggle"
24935 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24936 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24937 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24938 the document class.
24939 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24940 separated by a dot:
24941 \begin_inset Formula
24951 arg "math-number-toggle"
24954 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24955 You can only number displayed formulas.
24958 \begin_layout Standard
24959 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24961 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24962 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24964 \begin_inset space ~
24968 \begin_inset space ~
24976 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24979 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24980 \begin_inset Formula
24983 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24989 To number all lines use the shortcut
24992 arg "math-number-toggle"
24998 \begin_layout Standard
24999 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25002 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25003 A label is inserted with the menu
25005 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25014 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25015 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25016 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25028 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25029 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25030 We inserted in the following example the label
25031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25038 in the second line:
25039 \begin_inset Formula
25041 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25042 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25047 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25048 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25049 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25051 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25053 \begin_inset space ~
25061 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25065 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25066 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25067 as the formula number:
25070 \begin_layout Standard
25071 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25074 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25081 \begin_layout Standard
25082 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
25083 \begin_inset space ~
25087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25089 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25094 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25102 \begin_layout Section
25103 User defined math macros
25104 \begin_inset Index idx
25107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25116 \begin_layout Standard
25117 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25118 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25119 Math macros are explained in section
25122 \begin_inset space ~
25134 \begin_layout Section
25138 \begin_layout Subsection
25140 \begin_inset Index idx
25143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25152 \begin_layout Standard
25153 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25154 To set a font in a formula, use the
25157 \begin_inset space ~
25165 arg "math-insert \\font"
25168 , or enter its command, listed in table
25169 \begin_inset space ~
25173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25175 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25182 \begin_layout Standard
25183 \begin_inset Float table
25188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25189 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25194 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25198 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25208 \begin_inset Tabular
25209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25210 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25271 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25298 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25358 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25385 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25419 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25446 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25480 \begin_layout Standard
25481 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25489 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25505 \begin_layout Standard
25506 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25507 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25512 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25513 space when you need a space in the box.
25514 Here is an example where
25515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25526 denotes the set of numbers:
25527 \begin_inset Formula
25529 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25537 \begin_layout Standard
25538 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25539 You can, for example, put a character in
25548 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25552 \begin_inset Newline newline
25555 So it is better not to use this feature.
25558 \begin_layout Standard
25559 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25560 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25564 \begin_inset Newline newline
25567 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25573 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25574 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25580 \begin_layout Standard
25587 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25590 \begin_layout Standard
25591 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25593 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25594 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25596 \begin_inset space ~
25604 \begin_layout Subsection
25606 \begin_inset Index idx
25609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25618 \begin_layout Standard
25619 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25621 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25625 \begin_inset space ~
25629 \begin_inset space ~
25637 \begin_inset space ~
25645 arg "math-insert \\font"
25649 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25650 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25651 Here is an example:
25652 \begin_inset Formula
25655 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25656 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25665 \begin_layout Subsection
25667 \begin_inset Index idx
25670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25679 \begin_layout Standard
25680 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25681 automatically chosen in most situations.
25699 For most characters,
25707 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25708 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25713 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25714 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25716 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25719 arg "math-insert \\style"
25723 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25724 For example, you can set
25725 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25728 , which is normally in
25737 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25741 The four styles are used in the following example:
25744 \begin_layout Standard
25745 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25749 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25753 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25757 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25763 \begin_layout Standard
25764 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25765 is set in a particular size with the menu
25767 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25769 \begin_inset space ~
25774 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25775 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25776 will be adjusted to correspond.
25777 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25788 \begin_layout Standard
25792 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25798 \begin_layout Section
25800 \begin_inset Index idx
25803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25810 \begin_inset Index idx
25813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25822 \begin_layout Standard
25823 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25824 (AMS) that are in common use.
25827 \begin_layout Subsection
25828 Enabling AMS-Support
25831 \begin_layout Standard
25832 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25833 the document by selecting the checkbox
25836 \begin_inset space ~
25840 \begin_inset space ~
25844 \begin_inset space ~
25851 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25855 \begin_inset Index idx
25858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25859 Document ! Settings
25867 \begin_inset space ~
25873 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25874 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25877 \begin_layout Subsection
25879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25881 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25886 \begin_inset Index idx
25889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25890 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25898 \begin_layout Standard
25899 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25900 LyX allows you to choose between
25921 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25922 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25928 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25931 \begin_layout Chapter
25935 \begin_layout Section
25937 \begin_inset Index idx
25940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25949 name "sec:Cross-References"
25956 \begin_layout Standard
25957 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25958 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25960 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25961 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25962 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25965 \begin_layout Enumerate
25969 \begin_layout Enumerate
25970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25972 name "enu:Second-item"
25979 \begin_layout Enumerate
25983 \begin_layout Standard
25984 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25986 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25989 or by pressing the toolbar button
25996 A gray label box like this:
25997 \begin_inset Graphics
25998 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
26003 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26004 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26039 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26040 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26056 \begin_layout Standard
26057 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26059 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26062 or the toolbar button
26065 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26069 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26070 \begin_inset Graphics
26071 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26076 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26078 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26091 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26095 \begin_layout Standard
26096 As an alternative to
26098 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26101 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26106 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26107 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26109 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26121 \begin_layout Standard
26122 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26123 \begin_inset space ~
26127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26129 reference "enu:Second-item"
26136 \begin_layout Standard
26137 It is recommended to use a protected space
26141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26142 described in section
26143 \begin_inset space ~
26147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26149 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26158 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26159 line breaks between them.
26162 \begin_layout Standard
26163 There are six formats of cross-references:
26166 \begin_layout Description
26167 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26170 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26177 \begin_layout Description
26178 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26179 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26191 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26198 \begin_layout Description
26199 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26200 \begin_inset space ~
26204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26205 LatexCommand pageref
26206 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26213 \begin_layout Description
26215 \begin_inset space ~
26219 \begin_inset space ~
26222 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26224 LatexCommand vpageref
26225 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26230 \begin_inset Newline newline
26233 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26234 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26235 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26236 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26237 it prints “on the next page”.
26238 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26241 \begin_layout Description
26243 \begin_inset space ~
26247 \begin_inset space ~
26251 \begin_inset space ~
26254 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26257 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26262 \begin_inset Newline newline
26265 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26271 ; otherwise it behaves like
26275 \begin_inset space ~
26279 \begin_inset space ~
26288 \begin_layout Description
26290 \begin_inset space ~
26293 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26294 \begin_inset Newline newline
26298 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26306 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26315 \begin_inset Index idx
26318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26319 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26325 \begin_inset Index idx
26328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26329 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26340 \begin_inset Newline newline
26343 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26346 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26350 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26351 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26359 is the default and preferred because
26363 supports only English documents.
26364 The format is specified by using the command
26376 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26377 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26390 ) can be done with this command
26391 \begin_inset Newline newline
26398 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26403 \begin_inset Newline newline
26406 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26408 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26410 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26417 \begin_layout Description
26419 \begin_inset space ~
26422 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26424 LatexCommand nameref
26425 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26432 \begin_layout Standard
26433 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26434 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26435 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26439 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26443 \begin_layout Standard
26444 You can only use the style
26448 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26452 is always possible.
26455 \begin_layout Standard
26456 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26457 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26459 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26460 \begin_inset space ~
26464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26466 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26473 \begin_layout Standard
26474 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26478 \begin_inset space ~
26482 \begin_inset space ~
26487 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26488 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26491 \begin_inset space ~
26496 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26497 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26500 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26506 \begin_layout Standard
26507 You can change labels at any time.
26508 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26509 do not need to think about this.
26512 \begin_layout Standard
26513 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26514 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26515 instead of the reference.
26518 \begin_layout Standard
26519 References are described in detail in the section
26520 \begin_inset space ~
26524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26534 \begin_inset space ~
26542 \begin_layout Section
26543 Table of Contents and other Listings
26544 \begin_inset Index idx
26547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26554 \begin_inset Index idx
26557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26573 \begin_layout Subsection
26575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26577 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26584 \begin_layout Standard
26585 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26587 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26588 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26590 \begin_inset space ~
26594 \begin_inset space ~
26600 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26601 If you click on it, the
26605 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26606 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26607 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26609 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26611 \begin_inset space ~
26616 that is described in section
26617 \begin_inset space ~
26621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26623 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26630 \begin_layout Standard
26631 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26632 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26634 \begin_inset space ~
26638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26640 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26644 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26646 \begin_inset space ~
26650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26652 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26656 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26658 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26661 \begin_layout Subsection
26662 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26665 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26672 \begin_layout Standard
26673 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26675 You can insert them via the
26677 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26681 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26684 \begin_layout Section
26685 URLs and Hyperlinks
26686 \begin_inset Index idx
26689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26696 \begin_inset Index idx
26699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26708 \begin_layout Subsection
26710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26719 \begin_layout Standard
26720 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26722 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26728 \begin_layout Standard
26729 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26730 \begin_inset Flex URL
26733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26743 \begin_layout Standard
26744 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26750 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26754 \begin_layout Standard
26755 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26763 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26771 \begin_layout Subsection
26773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26775 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26782 \begin_layout Standard
26783 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26785 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26788 or with the toolbar button
26795 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26804 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26805 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26806 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26808 name "LyX's homepage"
26809 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26813 , an Email address like this:
26814 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26816 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26817 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26822 , or a link to a file.
26825 \begin_layout Standard
26826 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26839 to the link target.
26842 \begin_layout Standard
26843 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26844 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26845 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26846 the text style dialog.
26847 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26851 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26853 name "LyX's homepage"
26854 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26861 \begin_layout Standard
26862 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26866 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26868 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26869 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26873 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26875 \begin_inset Newline newline
26883 \begin_inset Newline newline
26890 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26893 \begin_layout Section
26895 \begin_inset Index idx
26898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26907 name "sec:Appendices"
26914 \begin_layout Standard
26915 Appendices are created with the menu
26917 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26919 \begin_inset space ~
26923 \begin_inset space ~
26929 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26930 as the appendix part of the book.
26931 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26934 \begin_layout Standard
26935 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26936 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26937 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26938 and the subsection number.
26939 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26943 \begin_layout Standard
26945 \begin_inset space ~
26949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26951 reference "chap:Credits"
26956 \begin_inset space ~
26960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26962 reference "sub:Export"
26969 \begin_layout Section
26971 \begin_inset Index idx
26974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26983 name "sec:Bibliography"
26990 \begin_layout Standard
26991 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26992 You can include a bibliography database,
26996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26997 Known under the name
26998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27010 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27011 manually, using the paragraph environment
27015 , which was described in section
27016 \begin_inset space ~
27020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27022 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
27027 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27028 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27032 use a bibliography database.
27035 \begin_layout Subsection
27036 The Bibliography Environment
27039 \begin_layout Standard
27044 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27046 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27055 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27057 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
27059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27066 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27069 \begin_layout Standard
27070 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27072 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27075 or the toolbar button
27078 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27082 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27083 containing the available citations.
27084 Select one or more keys from the list and
27094 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27095 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27099 \begin_layout Standard
27100 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27101 entry with surrounding brackets.
27106 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27107 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27119 \begin_layout Standard
27122 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
27125 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27127 key "latexcompanion"
27134 \begin_layout Standard
27135 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27136 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27145 \begin_layout Standard
27146 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27149 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27151 \begin_inset space ~
27159 arg "layout-paragraph"
27163 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27166 \begin_layout Subsection
27167 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27168 \begin_inset Index idx
27171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27172 Bibliography ! Databases
27178 \begin_inset Index idx
27181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27182 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27190 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27197 \begin_layout Standard
27198 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27204 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27206 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27207 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27212 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27214 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27215 your working field in a database.
27216 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27217 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27218 list for that document.
27219 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27223 \begin_layout Standard
27224 The database is a text file with the file extension
27225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27236 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27237 The format is explained in
27238 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27244 and in the LaTeX books (
27245 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27247 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27252 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27253 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27254 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27255 \begin_inset Flex URL
27258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27260 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27268 \begin_layout Standard
27269 To use a database, use the menu
27271 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27276 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27289 \begin_inset space ~
27295 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27296 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27303 Add bibliography to TOC
27305 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27310 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27311 in the document or just the cited references.
27314 \begin_layout Standard
27315 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27327 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27328 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27329 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27331 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27337 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27338 \begin_inset Newline newline
27342 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27344 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27356 \begin_layout Standard
27357 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27360 \begin_layout Standard
27361 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27362 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27368 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27369 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27374 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27375 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27376 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27391 The following variants are possible:
27394 \begin_layout Description
27395 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27396 with other bibliography packages (e.
27397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27401 \begin_inset space \space{}
27408 ), only with the package
27412 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27416 \begin_layout Description
27417 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27418 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27419 with all bibliography packages, except
27424 \begin_layout Description
27425 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27430 , works with all bibliography packages
27433 \begin_layout Standard
27434 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27436 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27451 \begin_layout Standard
27452 When you select the option
27454 Sectioned bibliography
27458 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27459 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27462 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27463 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27465 Customizing Bibliographies
27473 Additional Features
27478 \begin_layout Standard
27479 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27480 the two methods of creating them.
27481 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27482 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27483 We used the style file
27487 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27490 \begin_layout Subsection
27491 Bibliography layout
27492 \begin_inset Index idx
27495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27496 Bibliography ! Layout
27504 \begin_layout Standard
27505 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27506 For this feature you need to enable the option
27512 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27516 \begin_inset Index idx
27519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27520 Document ! Settings
27530 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27531 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27532 in the previous section.
27535 \begin_layout Standard
27536 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27537 the citation reference window.
27538 Here is an example where the text
27539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27543 \begin_inset space ~
27547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27550 appears after the reference:
27553 \begin_layout Standard
27555 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27558 key "latexcompanion"
27565 \begin_layout Section
27567 \begin_inset Index idx
27570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27586 \begin_layout Standard
27587 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27589 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27591 \begin_inset space ~
27596 or the toolbar button
27603 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27604 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27605 by LyX as the index entry.
27608 \begin_layout Standard
27609 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27611 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27612 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27614 \begin_inset space ~
27620 A light blue box labeled
27621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27632 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27633 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27636 \begin_layout Standard
27637 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27638 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27640 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27642 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27649 \begin_layout Subsection
27650 Grouping Index Entries
27651 \begin_inset Index idx
27654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27663 \begin_layout Standard
27664 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27666 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27667 lists under the entry
27668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27676 First we create the entry
27677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27685 \begin_inset space ~
27689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27691 reference "sub:Lists"
27696 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27697 \begin_inset space ~
27701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27703 reference "sec:Itemize"
27707 , we insert the command
27710 \begin_layout Standard
27716 \begin_layout Standard
27720 \begin_layout Standard
27726 \begin_layout Standard
27727 for the enumerated list in section
27728 \begin_inset space ~
27732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27734 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27741 \begin_layout Standard
27742 The exclamation mark
27743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27750 marks the grouping levels.
27751 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27752 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27753 If we don't have an index entry for
27754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27761 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27764 \begin_layout Subsection
27766 \begin_inset Index idx
27769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27770 Index ! Page ranges
27778 \begin_layout Standard
27779 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27781 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27782 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27783 an index entry in section
27784 \begin_inset space ~
27788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27790 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27797 \begin_layout Standard
27800 Paragraph environments|(
27803 \begin_layout Standard
27804 and another entry at the end of section
27805 \begin_inset space ~
27809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27811 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27818 \begin_layout Standard
27821 Paragraph environments|)
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27849 respectively start and end the index range.
27850 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27851 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27852 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27853 An example is the index entry
27854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27857 Document ! Settings
27858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27864 \begin_layout Subsection
27866 \begin_inset Index idx
27869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27870 Index ! Cross referencing
27878 \begin_layout Standard
27879 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27880 We referred for example in the index entry
27881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27889 \begin_inset space ~
27893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27895 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27899 ) to the index entry
27900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27907 in the same section using the entry
27910 \begin_layout Standard
27913 GIF|see{Image formats}
27916 \begin_layout Standard
27917 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27918 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27919 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27922 \begin_layout Subsection
27924 \begin_inset Index idx
27927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27928 Index ! Entry order
27936 \begin_layout Standard
27937 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27938 follow the rules for the index order.
27939 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27944 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27946 \begin_inset space ~
27950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27952 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27961 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27962 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27987 \begin_inset Index idx
27990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27991 Dummy entries ! maïs
27997 \begin_inset Index idx
28000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28001 Dummy entries ! maître
28007 \begin_inset Index idx
28010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28011 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28016 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28017 maïs, maison, maître.
28018 To achieve this, we use the command
28021 \begin_layout Standard
28024 previous entry@current entry
28027 \begin_layout Standard
28028 In our case we want to have
28029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28044 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28047 \begin_layout Standard
28053 \begin_layout Standard
28054 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28055 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
28056 See the next subsection for an example.
28059 \begin_layout Standard
28060 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28066 \begin_layout Standard
28067 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28072 to generate the index (see sec.
28073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28079 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28088 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
28090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28096 reference "sub:Document-Font"
28100 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
28101 index commands start with
28102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28114 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28119 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28122 \begin_layout Standard
28134 \begin_layout Standard
28146 \begin_layout Subsection
28148 \begin_inset Index idx
28151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28152 Index ! Entry layout
28160 \begin_layout Standard
28161 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28162 \begin_inset Index idx
28165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28168 This is an italic dummy entry
28173 You can also format the page number using the character
28174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28181 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28182 We can write for example
28185 \begin_layout Standard
28188 italic page number:|textit
28191 \begin_layout Standard
28192 to get the page number in italic.
28193 \begin_inset Index idx
28196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28197 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28202 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28220 \begin_inset space ~
28226 Have a look at section
28227 \begin_inset space ~
28231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28233 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28237 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28240 \begin_layout Standard
28241 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28249 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28253 to generate the index, see sec.
28254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28260 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28269 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28274 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28278 key "latexcompanion"
28290 \begin_layout Standard
28291 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28293 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28294 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28295 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28296 If so, put the following in the preamble
28299 \begin_layout Standard
28311 \begin_layout Standard
28315 \begin_layout Standard
28321 \begin_layout Standard
28322 in the index entry.
28323 \begin_inset Index idx
28326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28327 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28332 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28333 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28334 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28337 \begin_layout Standard
28338 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28339 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28340 a bold font for all index entries.
28341 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28353 documentation for details,
28354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28356 key "makeindex,xindy"
28363 \begin_layout Subsection
28365 \begin_inset Index idx
28368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28377 name "sub:Index-Program"
28384 \begin_layout Standard
28385 If the index generation program
28389 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28393 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28402 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28403 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28404 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28405 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28406 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28416 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28417 dialog, see section
28418 \begin_inset space ~
28422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28424 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28429 The available options are listed and explained in
28430 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28432 key "makeindex,xindy"
28437 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28441 \begin_layout Standard
28442 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28443 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28446 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28447 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28451 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28452 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28455 \begin_layout Subsection
28459 \begin_layout Standard
28460 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28461 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28469 next to the standard index.
28470 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28471 that add this feature.
28477 \begin_inset Index idx
28480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28481 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28486 package to generate multiple indexes.
28487 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28492 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28493 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28500 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28501 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28502 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28510 \begin_layout Standard
28511 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28513 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28514 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28517 and select the option
28519 Use multiple Indexes
28526 already contains the standard index
28527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28535 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28536 also appear as a heading) to the
28540 input field and press the
28545 The new index now also appears in the list.
28546 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28550 \begin_layout Standard
28551 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28554 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28561 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28562 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28563 are additional features:
28566 \begin_layout Itemize
28567 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28568 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28571 \begin_layout Itemize
28572 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28573 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28581 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28582 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28583 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28584 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28587 \begin_layout Section
28588 Nomenclature/Glossary
28589 \begin_inset Index idx
28592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28599 \begin_inset Index idx
28602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28633 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28640 \begin_layout Standard
28641 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28642 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28643 called nomenclature or glossary.
28646 \begin_layout Standard
28647 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28653 \begin_inset Index idx
28656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28657 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28663 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28670 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28673 \begin_layout Standard
28674 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28675 and then use the menu
28677 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28683 \begin_inset space ~
28688 or the toolbar button
28691 arg "nomencl-insert"
28696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28707 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28710 \begin_layout Standard
28711 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28712 The first is the term or
28716 that you wish to define.
28721 of the term or symbol.
28724 \begin_layout Standard
28725 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28733 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28741 \begin_layout Subsection
28742 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28743 \begin_inset Index idx
28746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28747 Nomenclature ! Layout
28755 \begin_layout Standard
28756 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28760 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28766 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28774 \begin_inset Newline newline
28782 \begin_inset Newline newline
28788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28795 character starts/ends the formula.
28796 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28808 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28818 \begin_layout Standard
28819 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28820 \begin_inset space ~
28824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28826 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28833 \begin_layout Standard
28837 \begin_inset space ~
28842 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28843 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28848 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28855 in this document is:
28856 \begin_inset Newline newline
28861 dummy entry for the character
28866 \begin_inset Newline newline
28878 \begin_inset space ~
28888 font use the command
28917 \begin_layout Standard
28918 If the characters |
28919 \begin_inset space \space{}
28923 \begin_inset space \space{}
28927 \begin_inset space \space{}
28931 \begin_inset space \space{}
28935 \begin_inset space \space{}
28938 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28939 a quote character in front of them.
28940 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28941 LatexCommand nomenclature
28942 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28943 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28950 \begin_layout Subsection
28951 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28952 \begin_inset Index idx
28955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28956 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28964 \begin_layout Standard
28965 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28966 the symbol definition.
28967 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28969 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28972 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28973 LatexCommand nomenclature
28975 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28982 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28986 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28987 LatexCommand nomenclature
28990 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28995 They will be sorted by
28996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29022 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29025 will be sorted before the
29029 since the character
29030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29037 is considered in sorting.
29040 \begin_layout Standard
29041 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29044 \begin_inset space ~
29049 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29050 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29052 For the example given, you can insert
29056 in this field for the
29057 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29064 will be located before
29065 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29071 \begin_layout Standard
29072 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29077 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29086 \begin_layout Subsection
29087 Nomenclature Options
29088 \begin_inset Index idx
29091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29092 Nomenclature ! Options
29100 \begin_layout Standard
29105 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29106 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29109 \begin_layout Description
29110 refeq Appends the phrase
29111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29126 to every nomenclature entry, where
29132 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29135 \begin_layout Description
29136 refpage Appends the phrase
29137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29152 to every nomenclature entry, where
29158 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29161 \begin_layout Description
29162 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29165 \begin_layout Standard
29166 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29167 class options list in the
29169 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29173 In this document the options
29180 \begin_layout Standard
29181 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29187 \begin_layout Standard
29188 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29189 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29194 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29197 \begin_layout Description
29207 \begin_layout Description
29210 nomrefpage Like the
29217 \begin_layout Description
29220 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29229 \begin_layout Description
29233 \begin_inset space ~
29239 \begin_inset space ~
29244 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29247 \begin_layout Standard
29249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29256 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29257 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29260 \begin_layout Standard
29268 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29271 \begin_inset Newline newline
29278 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29283 \begin_inset Newline newline
29287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29302 by their translation.
29305 \begin_layout Subsection
29306 Printing the Nomenclature
29307 \begin_inset Index idx
29310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29311 Nomenclature ! Printing
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29320 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29322 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29323 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29339 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29340 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29341 You can choose between these settings:
29344 \begin_layout Description
29345 Default a space of 1
29346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29352 \begin_layout Description
29354 \begin_inset space ~
29358 \begin_inset space ~
29361 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29364 \begin_layout Description
29365 Custom custom space
29368 \begin_layout Standard
29369 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29378 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29386 For example, in order to change the name to
29390 , add the following line to the preamble:
29393 \begin_layout Standard
29401 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29404 \begin_layout Subsection
29405 Nomenclature Program
29406 \begin_inset Index idx
29409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29410 Nomenclature ! Program
29416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29418 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29425 \begin_layout Standard
29426 LyX uses the program
29430 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29431 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29436 by adding options, see section
29437 \begin_inset space ~
29441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29443 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29448 The available options are listed and explained in
29449 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29451 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29458 \begin_layout Section
29460 \begin_inset Index idx
29463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29470 \begin_inset Index idx
29473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29474 Document ! Branches
29480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29482 name "sec:Branches"
29489 \begin_layout Standard
29490 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29491 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29492 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29493 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29496 \begin_layout Standard
29497 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29498 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29499 To create a branch, either select the menu
29501 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29502 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29505 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29507 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29514 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29515 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29516 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29517 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29518 (see below for an example).
29519 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29520 to the name of the other) and to add
29521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29533 \begin_inset space ~
29536 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29537 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29540 \begin_layout Standard
29541 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29542 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29544 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29547 where you can choose a branch.
29548 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29552 \begin_layout Standard
29553 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29554 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29557 \begin_layout Standard
29558 \begin_inset Branch Question
29561 \begin_layout Standard
29562 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29570 \begin_layout Standard
29571 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29574 \begin_layout Standard
29575 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29583 \begin_layout Standard
29590 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29591 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29594 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29595 Consider for example a file
29596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29603 which has the above branches.
29605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29612 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29636 branch were inactive,
29637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29652 branch was active, likewise
29653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29668 branch was active, and
29669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29672 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29676 if both branches were active.
29677 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29680 \begin_layout Standard
29681 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29687 \begin_layout Standard
29688 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29689 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29691 For example you can define for the question branch
29695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29696 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29697 \begin_inset space ~
29701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29703 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29715 \begin_layout Standard
29725 \begin_layout Standard
29735 \begin_layout Standard
29736 and for the answer branch
29739 \begin_layout Standard
29749 \begin_layout Standard
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29760 \begin_inset Branch Question
29763 \begin_layout Standard
29767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29795 \begin_layout Standard
29796 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29799 \begin_layout Standard
29803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29831 \begin_layout Standard
29832 Now it is possible to use the
29836 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29843 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29846 commands to obtain conditional output.
29847 Here is an example formula where only the
29854 \begin_inset Formula
29856 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29864 \begin_layout Standard
29865 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29873 \begin_layout Standard
29874 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29880 \begin_inset space \space{}
29883 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29884 For this advanced usage, see the
29889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29892 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29899 \begin_layout Section
29901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29903 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29908 \begin_inset Index idx
29911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29920 \begin_layout Standard
29923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29927 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29929 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29934 \begin_inset Index idx
29937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29938 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29943 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29944 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29945 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29946 part of the document.
29950 \begin_layout Standard
29951 The header information in the dialog tab
29955 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29956 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29957 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29958 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29962 \begin_inset space ~
29966 \begin_inset space ~
29971 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29972 title and author entries.
29976 \begin_inset space ~
29980 \begin_inset space ~
29984 \begin_inset space ~
29989 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29992 \begin_layout Standard
29993 You can specify in the dialog tab
29997 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30002 \begin_inset space ~
30006 \begin_inset space ~
30010 \begin_inset space ~
30015 option allows long links to be split;
30018 \begin_inset space ~
30022 \begin_inset space ~
30026 \begin_inset space ~
30034 \begin_inset space ~
30039 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30042 \begin_inset space ~
30047 colors the different links.
30048 The default colors are:
30051 \begin_layout Labeling
30052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30057 for hyperlinks and URLs
30060 \begin_layout Labeling
30061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30069 \begin_layout Labeling
30070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30078 \begin_layout Standard
30079 but you can change these in the field
30084 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30087 \begin_layout Standard
30090 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30093 \begin_layout Standard
30098 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30099 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30100 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30103 \begin_layout Standard
30108 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30109 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30110 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30120 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30121 when opening the PDF.
30123 \begin_inset space ~
30126 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30127 \begin_inset space ~
30130 1 will only display the sections.
30133 \begin_layout Standard
30134 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30135 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30141 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30142 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30151 \begin_layout Section
30152 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30155 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30162 \begin_layout Subsection
30164 \begin_inset Index idx
30167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30176 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30183 \begin_layout Standard
30184 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30185 constructs, but not all.
30186 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30187 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30188 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30189 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30190 and their commands.
30193 \begin_layout Standard
30194 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30196 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30198 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30211 \begin_inset space ~
30216 or by the toolbar button
30229 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30237 \begin_layout Standard
30238 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30239 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30240 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30241 using the LaTeX-command
30247 , you can write the command part
30253 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30257 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30258 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30259 the following example:
30262 \begin_layout Standard
30263 \begin_inset Graphics
30264 filename clipart/ERT.png
30272 \begin_layout Standard
30276 \begin_layout Standard
30277 This is a line with a
30281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30304 \begin_layout Standard
30305 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30313 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30314 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30322 \begin_layout Subsection
30323 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30324 \begin_inset Argument 1
30327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30334 \begin_inset Index idx
30337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30346 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30353 \begin_layout Standard
30354 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30355 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30356 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30365 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30366 any time if you know the right commands.
30367 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30368 is the end of the day.
30369 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30370 all caption labels bold.
30371 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30373 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30377 \begin_layout Standard
30378 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30379 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30380 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30382 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30391 \begin_layout Standard
30392 As result you find that the package
30397 \begin_inset Index idx
30400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30401 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30407 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30409 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30412 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30427 \begin_inset space ~
30435 \begin_layout Standard
30440 usepackage[options]{package name}
30443 \begin_layout Standard
30444 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30445 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30446 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30449 \begin_layout Standard
30450 In your case the package name is
30455 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30460 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30461 So you add the command
30464 \begin_layout Standard
30469 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30472 \begin_layout Standard
30473 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30478 For more commands provided by the
30482 package, have a look at its documentation,
30483 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30497 \begin_layout Standard
30498 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30500 For example if you use a
30504 class, you don't need the package
30508 , you can instead write
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30516 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30521 \begin_layout Standard
30522 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30523 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30524 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30531 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30534 \begin_layout Standard
30535 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30536 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30538 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30539 the previous section.
30542 \begin_layout Standard
30543 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30545 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30547 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30554 \begin_layout Standard
30555 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30561 \begin_layout Standard
30565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30575 \begin_inset Note Note
30578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30579 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30587 \begin_layout Left Header
30588 \begin_inset Argument 1
30591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30611 \begin_inset Note Note
30614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30615 defines the header line as described below
30623 \begin_layout Center Header
30624 \begin_inset Argument 1
30627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30636 \begin_layout Right Header
30637 \begin_inset Argument 1
30640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30661 \begin_layout Left Footer
30662 \begin_inset Argument 1
30665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30686 \begin_layout Center Footer
30687 \begin_inset Argument 1
30690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30701 \begin_inset Newline newline
30705 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30711 \begin_layout Right Footer
30712 \begin_inset Argument 1
30715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30737 \begin_layout Section
30738 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30741 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30746 \begin_inset Index idx
30749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30750 Document ! Header/Footer line
30756 \begin_inset Index idx
30759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30768 \begin_layout Standard
30769 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30773 \begin_inset space ~
30784 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30790 \begin_inset space ~
30796 As a second step add in the menu
30798 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30799 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30806 Custom Header/Footerlines
30807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30811 This module offers the following 6
30812 \begin_inset space ~
30818 \begin_layout Description
30820 \begin_inset space ~
30824 \begin_inset space ~
30828 \begin_inset space ~
30832 \begin_inset space ~
30836 \begin_inset space ~
30842 \begin_layout Description
30844 \begin_inset space ~
30848 \begin_inset space ~
30852 \begin_inset space ~
30856 \begin_inset space ~
30860 \begin_inset space ~
30866 \begin_layout Standard
30867 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30870 \begin_layout Standard
30871 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30872 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30874 \begin_inset space ~
30878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30880 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30884 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30887 \begin_layout Standard
30888 \begin_inset Float figure
30894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30897 \begin_inset Tabular
30898 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30899 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30900 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30901 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30902 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30904 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30922 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30933 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30951 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30962 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30966 The normal text on the page goes here.
30967 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30969 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30970 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30975 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30984 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30995 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31013 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31024 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31042 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31065 name "fig:Page-layout"
31069 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31082 \begin_layout Standard
31083 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31091 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31095 \begin_inset space ~
31100 is set to “Default”.
31101 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31110 \begin_layout Subsection
31114 \begin_layout Standard
31115 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31116 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31117 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31118 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31120 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31121 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31124 \begin_layout Standard
31125 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
31128 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31141 \begin_inset space ~
31149 \begin_layout Description
31152 thepage prints the current page number
31155 \begin_layout Description
31158 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31161 \begin_layout Description
31164 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31167 \begin_layout Description
31170 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31171 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31178 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31181 because it usually goes in a left header.
31184 \begin_layout Description
31187 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31188 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31190 It is normally used in the right header.
31193 \begin_layout Subsection
31194 Default header/footer
31197 \begin_layout Standard
31198 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31199 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31200 footer has the page number.
31201 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31202 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31203 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31206 \begin_inset space ~
31214 \begin_layout Subsection
31218 \begin_layout Standard
31219 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31220 Some pages are different.
31221 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31222 a new part or chapter in your book.
31223 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31224 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31225 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31229 Header and footer decoration line
31232 \begin_layout Standard
31233 By default, you get a 0.4
31234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31237 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31238 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31250 in the following way:
31253 \begin_layout Standard
31260 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31263 \begin_layout Standard
31264 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31273 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31280 \begin_layout Standard
31281 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31282 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31283 \begin_inset space ~
31287 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31297 Several header/footer lines
31300 \begin_layout Standard
31301 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31302 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31303 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31305 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31319 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31320 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31333 \begin_inset space ~
31341 \begin_layout Standard
31348 headheight}{height}
31351 \begin_layout Standard
31352 where height is a size in standard units.
31353 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31354 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31355 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31357 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31374 \begin_inset space ~
31379 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31384 \begin_inset Index idx
31387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31388 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31394 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31395 for your header/footer.
31398 \begin_layout Subsection
31402 \begin_layout Standard
31403 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31404 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31405 This example consists of the following definition:
31408 \begin_layout Description
31410 \begin_inset space ~
31419 , empty optional argument
31422 \begin_layout Description
31424 \begin_inset space ~
31427 Header empty, empty optional argument
31430 \begin_layout Description
31432 \begin_inset space ~
31441 in the optional argument
31444 \begin_layout Description
31446 \begin_inset space ~
31455 in the optional argument
31458 \begin_layout Description
31460 \begin_inset space ~
31472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31476 \begin_inset Newline newline
31480 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31487 in the optional argument
31490 \begin_layout Description
31492 \begin_inset space ~
31501 , empty optional argument
31504 \begin_layout Description
31507 headrulewidth set to 2
31508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31514 \begin_layout Standard
31515 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31516 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31531 \begin_layout Standard
31532 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31538 \begin_layout Standard
31542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31546 pagestyle{headings}
31552 \begin_inset Note Note
31555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31556 switches back to page style with the default headings
31564 \begin_layout Section
31565 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31568 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31573 \begin_inset Index idx
31576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31583 \begin_inset Index idx
31586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31595 \begin_layout Standard
31596 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31597 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31598 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31601 \begin_layout Subsection
31605 \begin_layout Standard
31606 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31611 \begin_inset Index idx
31614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31615 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31620 (on some systems named simply
31625 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31627 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31633 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31634 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31642 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31643 automatically installed together with LyX.
31646 \begin_layout Subsection
31650 \begin_layout Standard
31651 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31652 LaTeX, activate the option
31655 \begin_inset space ~
31662 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31668 \begin_inset space ~
31672 \begin_inset space ~
31675 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31682 \begin_inset space ~
31695 \begin_inset space ~
31700 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31703 \begin_layout Standard
31704 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31708 \begin_inset space ~
31716 \begin_inset space ~
31724 \begin_layout Standard
31725 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31729 \begin_layout Standard
31730 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31738 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31739 generated by activating the option
31742 \begin_inset space ~
31748 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31756 \begin_layout Subsection
31757 Selected document parts
31760 \begin_layout Standard
31761 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31762 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31763 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31764 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31766 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31770 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31771 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31772 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31776 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31782 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31793 is explained in section
31795 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31800 \begin_inset space ~
31810 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31811 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31813 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31815 Here is the result:
31818 \begin_layout Standard
31819 \begin_inset Preview
31821 \begin_layout Standard
31826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31830 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31836 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31846 height_special "totalheight"
31849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31874 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31880 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31902 \begin_layout Standard
31903 Previewing works also for colors.
31904 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31922 is explained in section
31929 \begin_inset space ~
31942 \begin_layout Standard
31943 \begin_inset Preview
31945 \begin_layout Standard
31949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31968 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31973 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31992 \begin_layout Standard
31993 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31999 \begin_layout Standard
32000 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32001 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
32002 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
32004 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
32005 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
32006 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
32007 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
32011 \begin_layout Subsection
32015 \begin_layout Standard
32016 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
32019 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32021 \begin_inset space ~
32026 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
32027 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32029 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
32030 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32031 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32032 the source view window.
32037 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
32038 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
32039 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
32042 \begin_layout Section
32043 Advanced Find and Replace
32044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32046 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32051 \begin_inset Index idx
32054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32061 \begin_inset Index idx
32064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32073 \begin_layout Subsection
32077 \begin_layout Standard
32078 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
32079 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
32080 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32081 The key-features are:
32084 \begin_layout Itemize
32085 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32086 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32087 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32091 \begin_layout Itemize
32092 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32093 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32094 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32095 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32098 \begin_layout Itemize
32099 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32100 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32101 outside of mathematics environments
32104 \begin_layout Itemize
32105 Search may be widened to a specific
32110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32114 \begin_inset space ~
32117 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32118 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32125 \begin_layout Itemize
32126 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32127 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32132 \begin_inset space ~
32135 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32138 \begin_layout Subsection
32142 \begin_layout Standard
32143 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32145 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32158 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32161 ) or the toolbar button
32164 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32170 Advanced Find and Replace
32175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32179 \begin_layout Standard
32184 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32188 \begin_inset space ~
32193 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32196 arg "paragraph-break"
32200 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32201 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32205 arg "paragraph-break"
32208 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32212 searches backwards.
32215 \begin_layout Standard
32219 \begin_inset space ~
32224 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32233 \begin_inset space ~
32238 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32242 Searching for mathematics
32245 \begin_layout Standard
32246 Mathematical formulas, such as
32247 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32250 or something more complex like
32251 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32254 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32259 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32260 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32261 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32262 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32268 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32272 \begin_layout Standard
32273 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32274 This is done by switching to the
32278 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32283 This way, entering in the
32290 \begin_layout Itemize
32291 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32292 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32295 \begin_layout Itemize
32296 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32297 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32300 \begin_layout Itemize
32301 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32302 of it only within section headings.
32303 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32304 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32308 \begin_layout Itemize
32309 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32310 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32313 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32317 \begin_layout Standard
32318 The entries made in the
32322 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32325 \begin_inset space ~
32331 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32335 button or alternatively press
32338 arg "paragraph-break"
32345 while the cursor is in the
32348 \begin_inset space ~
32356 \begin_layout Standard
32357 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32358 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32362 \begin_layout Itemize
32363 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32364 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32372 with its typewriter version
32373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32387 \begin_layout Itemize
32388 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32394 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32406 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32413 (you may want to enable the
32416 \begin_inset space ~
32424 \begin_inset space ~
32429 options and disable the
32437 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32445 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32446 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32450 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32453 , or occurrences of
32454 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32458 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32464 \begin_layout Subsection
32468 \begin_layout Standard
32469 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32474 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32476 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32478 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32487 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32493 This is done with the context menu
32495 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32496 Insert Regular Expression
32498 while the cursor is in the
32503 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32504 expression matching rules
32508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32509 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32515 \begin_inset space ~
32518 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32519 to match expressions.
32524 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32525 same text in the document.
32526 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32527 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32530 \begin_layout Enumerate
32531 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32536 editor the fraction
32537 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32541 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32544 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32545 fractions with the given denominator.
32548 \begin_layout Enumerate
32549 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32561 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32566 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32567 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32568 Also, by inserting a
32569 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32572 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32573 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32576 \begin_layout Standard
32577 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32578 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32579 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32582 , and referring back to them through
32583 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32587 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32591 For example, try searching with the regexp
32592 \begin_inset Newline newline
32595 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32598 \begin_inset Newline newline
32601 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32604 \begin_layout Standard
32605 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32608 \begin_layout Standard
32609 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32617 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32618 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32619 sub-expressions is absolute.
32621 \begin_inset space ~
32625 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32628 always refers to the first occurrence of
32629 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32632 in all entered regexps.
32640 \begin_layout Section
32642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32644 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32649 \begin_inset Index idx
32652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32661 \begin_layout Standard
32662 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32665 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32672 key or the toolbar button
32675 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32678 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32679 beginning of the currently selected text.
32680 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32681 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32682 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32683 scrolled so that it is visible.
32684 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32685 n, if any could be found.
32686 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32690 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32691 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32694 \begin_layout Standard
32695 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32698 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32702 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32703 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32704 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32705 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32708 \begin_inset space ~
32716 arg "dialog-show character"
32719 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32720 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32723 \begin_layout Standard
32724 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32725 \begin_inset Newline newline
32729 \begin_inset Flex URL
32732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32734 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32740 \begin_inset Newline newline
32744 \begin_inset space ~
32747 files for each language.
32748 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32749 \begin_inset space ~
32752 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32761 \begin_inset Newline newline
32764 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32765 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32766 but in most cases these are
32782 is the language code.
32785 \begin_layout Subsection
32789 \begin_layout Standard
32792 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32793 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32795 \begin_inset space ~
32798 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32801 you can set the following things:
32804 \begin_layout Description
32806 \begin_inset space ~
32809 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32810 Depending on your platform,
32824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32825 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32826 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32841 \begin_layout Description
32843 \begin_inset space ~
32846 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32847 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32850 \begin_layout Description
32852 \begin_inset space ~
32855 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32861 \begin_inset space \space{}
32865 This should normally not be needed.
32868 \begin_layout Description
32870 \begin_inset space ~
32874 \begin_inset space ~
32877 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32889 \begin_layout Description
32891 \begin_inset space ~
32894 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32895 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32896 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32897 appear in a context menu.
32898 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32902 \begin_layout Description
32904 \begin_inset space ~
32908 \begin_inset space ~
32912 \begin_inset space ~
32915 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32919 \begin_layout Section
32921 \begin_inset Index idx
32924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32933 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32940 \begin_layout Standard
32941 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32942 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32952 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32954 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32963 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32964 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32965 which are available for many languages.
32968 \begin_layout Standard
32969 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32973 \begin_layout Subsection
32974 Setting up the thesaurus
32977 \begin_layout Standard
32986 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32990 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32995 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33001 \begin_inset space ~
33009 For instance, the US English files are named:
33012 \begin_layout Itemize
33016 \begin_layout Itemize
33020 \begin_layout Standard
33029 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33030 and you just need to point LyX (in
33032 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33033 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33034 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33036 \begin_inset space ~
33041 ) to the path where they are installed.
33045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33046 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33047 ies, typical locations are
33053 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33057 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33061 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33064 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33070 LibreOffice-<Version>
33077 On the Mac, the default location is
33079 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
33080 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33081 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
33082 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
33083 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33084 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33092 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33093 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
33094 correct place right away.
33097 \begin_layout Standard
33098 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
33099 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33103 \begin_layout Itemize
33104 \begin_inset Flex URL
33107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33109 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33117 \begin_layout Standard
33118 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33119 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33121 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33122 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33123 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33125 \begin_inset space ~
33131 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33132 and point LyX there.
33135 \begin_layout Standard
33136 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33138 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33141 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33147 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33150 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33158 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33159 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33160 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33162 \begin_inset space ~
33167 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33170 \begin_layout Subsection
33171 Using the thesaurus
33174 \begin_layout Standard
33175 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33177 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33180 or the toolbar button
33183 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33186 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33188 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33190 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33191 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33192 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33201 ), related terms (such as
33204 \begin_inset space ~
33213 ), compounds (such as
33216 \begin_inset space ~
33225 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33234 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33237 \begin_layout Standard
33238 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33239 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33243 \begin_layout Standard
33244 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33245 the dictionary, such as the above
33249 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33254 \begin_inset space \space{}
33257 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33258 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33259 For example, looking up the word form
33263 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33268 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33273 \begin_inset space \space{}
33284 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33285 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33286 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33289 \begin_layout Section
33291 \begin_inset Index idx
33294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33301 \begin_inset Index idx
33304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33305 Document ! Change Tracking
33311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33313 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33320 \begin_layout Standard
33321 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33322 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33323 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33324 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33326 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33328 \begin_inset space ~
33331 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33333 \begin_inset space ~
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33342 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33356 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33357 You can change the color in
33359 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33360 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33362 \begin_inset space ~
33366 \begin_inset space ~
33371 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33377 \begin_inset Index idx
33380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33381 Color ! Change tracking
33386 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33387 the cursor is in changed text.
33388 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33391 arg "changes-merge"
33397 \begin_layout Standard
33398 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33399 \begin_inset Index idx
33402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33411 \begin_layout Standard
33412 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33418 \begin_layout Standard
33419 \begin_inset Graphics
33420 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33428 \begin_layout Standard
33429 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33435 \begin_layout Standard
33436 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33439 \begin_layout Standard
33440 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33446 \begin_layout Standard
33447 \begin_inset Tabular
33448 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33449 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33450 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33451 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33461 arg "changes-track"
33469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33475 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33477 \begin_inset space ~
33480 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33482 \begin_inset space ~
33491 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33500 arg "changes-output"
33508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33514 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33516 \begin_inset space ~
33519 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33521 \begin_inset space ~
33525 \begin_inset space ~
33529 \begin_inset space ~
33538 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33559 Jumps to the next change
33565 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33574 arg "change-accept"
33582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33588 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33590 \begin_inset space ~
33593 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33595 \begin_inset space ~
33604 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33613 arg "change-reject"
33621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33627 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33629 \begin_inset space ~
33632 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33634 \begin_inset space ~
33643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33652 arg "changes-merge"
33660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33666 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33668 \begin_inset space ~
33671 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33673 \begin_inset space ~
33682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33691 arg "all-changes-accept"
33699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33705 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33707 \begin_inset space ~
33710 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33712 \begin_inset space ~
33716 \begin_inset space ~
33725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33734 arg "all-changes-reject"
33742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33748 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33750 \begin_inset space ~
33753 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33755 \begin_inset space ~
33759 \begin_inset space ~
33768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33791 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33792 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33805 \begin_inset space ~
33814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33837 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33839 \begin_inset space ~
33855 \begin_layout Standard
33856 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33862 \begin_layout Standard
33863 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33883 \begin_layout Standard
33884 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33885 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33886 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33887 the next change after the current cursor position.
33888 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33889 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33890 step to the next change.
33891 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33894 \begin_layout Standard
33895 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33896 to describe a change.
33899 \begin_layout Standard
33900 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33905 \begin_inset Index idx
33908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33909 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33915 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33916 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33922 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33925 \begin_layout Section
33926 Comparison of Documents
33927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33929 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33934 \begin_inset Index idx
33937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33938 Comparison of documents
33946 \begin_layout Standard
33947 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33949 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33953 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33955 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33956 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33960 \begin_inset space ~
33964 \begin_inset space ~
33968 \begin_inset space ~
33977 \begin_inset space ~
33981 \begin_inset space ~
33985 \begin_inset space ~
33989 \begin_inset space ~
33993 \begin_inset space ~
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34002 enables the change tracking option
34005 \begin_inset space ~
34009 \begin_inset space ~
34013 \begin_inset space ~
34018 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34021 \begin_layout Section
34022 International Support
34023 \begin_inset Index idx
34026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34027 International support
34035 \begin_layout Standard
34036 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
34037 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34038 up LyX to use them:
34039 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34041 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34048 \begin_layout Standard
34049 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34050 \begin_inset space ~
34054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34056 reference "sub:Special-Character"
34063 \begin_layout Subsection
34065 \begin_inset Index idx
34068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34075 \begin_inset Index idx
34078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34079 Document ! Settings
34085 \begin_inset Index idx
34088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34089 Document ! Language
34097 \begin_layout Standard
34100 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34101 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34104 dialog lets you set
34106 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34111 \begin_layout Standard
34116 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
34120 \begin_inset space ~
34125 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34126 For details about the different encoding options see section
34127 \begin_inset space ~
34131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34133 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34140 \begin_layout Subsection
34141 Keyboard mapping configuration
34142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34144 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34151 \begin_layout Standard
34152 If you have for example a U.
34153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34156 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34157 can use an alternate keymap.
34158 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34159 use an Italian keymap.
34162 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34163 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34164 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34167 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34168 \begin_inset space ~
34172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34174 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34179 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34180 which one you want to use.
34183 \begin_layout Standard
34184 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34185 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34186 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34190 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34191 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34192 one to support the characters you want.
34193 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34200 \begin_layout Chapter
34203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34205 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34212 \begin_layout Standard
34213 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34214 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34215 topic inside the user's guide.
34218 \begin_layout Section
34220 \begin_inset Index idx
34223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34232 \begin_layout Standard
34237 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34240 \begin_layout Subsection
34244 \begin_layout Standard
34245 Creates a new document.
34248 \begin_layout Subsection
34252 \begin_layout Standard
34253 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34254 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34255 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34258 \begin_layout Subsection
34262 \begin_layout Standard
34266 \begin_layout Subsection
34270 \begin_layout Standard
34271 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34272 Click there on a file to open it.
34275 \begin_layout Subsection
34279 \begin_layout Standard
34280 Closes the current document.
34283 \begin_layout Subsection
34287 \begin_layout Standard
34288 Closes all opened documents.
34291 \begin_layout Subsection
34295 \begin_layout Standard
34296 Saves the actual document.
34299 \begin_layout Subsection
34303 \begin_layout Standard
34304 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34307 \begin_layout Subsection
34311 \begin_layout Standard
34312 Saves all opened documents.
34315 \begin_layout Subsection
34319 \begin_layout Standard
34320 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34323 \begin_layout Subsection
34327 \begin_layout Standard
34328 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34329 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34330 It is described in the section
34332 Version Control in LyX
34336 Additional Features
34341 \begin_layout Subsection
34345 \begin_layout Standard
34346 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34347 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34349 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34352 \begin_layout Standard
34353 When using the menu entry
34356 \begin_inset space ~
34361 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34365 \begin_inset space ~
34369 \begin_inset space ~
34373 \begin_inset space ~
34378 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34379 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34382 \begin_layout Subsection
34384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34393 \begin_layout Standard
34394 You can export your document to various file formats.
34395 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34396 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34397 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34400 \begin_layout Standard
34401 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34403 \begin_inset space ~
34407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34409 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34416 \begin_layout Description
34422 \begin_inset space ~
34429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34436 yX format of the special LyX
34437 \begin_inset space ~
34440 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34441 \begin_inset Newline newline
34444 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34447 \begin_layout Description
34448 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34454 \begin_layout Description
34456 \begin_inset space ~
34459 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34465 \begin_layout Description
34466 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34467 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34468 files paths or file names in your document.
34469 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34476 \begin_layout Description
34477 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34478 in files paths or file names
34481 \begin_layout Description
34483 \begin_inset space ~
34490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34497 eX) DVI-format using the program
34501 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34504 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34512 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34520 \begin_layout Description
34522 \begin_inset space ~
34525 (cropped) the same as
34529 but with cropped page margins.
34532 \begin_layout Description
34534 \begin_inset space ~
34537 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34541 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34546 \begin_layout Description
34550 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34558 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34566 \begin_layout Description
34568 \begin_inset space ~
34572 \begin_inset space ~
34575 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34579 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34587 \begin_layout Description
34594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34602 \begin_inset space ~
34613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34626 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34631 \begin_layout Description
34638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34646 \begin_inset space ~
34651 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34652 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34656 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34659 \begin_layout Description
34666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34674 \begin_inset space ~
34679 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34680 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34688 \begin_layout Description
34695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34703 \begin_inset space ~
34714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34727 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34732 \begin_layout Description
34734 \begin_inset space ~
34738 \begin_inset space ~
34747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34756 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34757 music notation software
34762 \begin_layout Description
34769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34779 \begin_inset space ~
34782 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (e.
34783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34787 \begin_inset space \space{}
34791 \begin_inset space ~
34795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34810 represent the version number)
34813 \begin_layout Description
34820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34830 \begin_inset space ~
34834 \begin_inset space ~
34837 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34838 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34839 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34842 \begin_layout Description
34849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34858 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34861 \begin_layout Description
34862 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34867 \begin_layout Description
34868 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34870 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34873 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34877 \begin_layout Description
34879 \begin_inset space ~
34882 (cropped) the same as
34885 \begin_inset space ~
34890 but with cropped page margins
34893 \begin_layout Description
34897 \begin_inset space ~
34902 PDF-format using the program
34906 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34909 \begin_layout Description
34913 \begin_inset space ~
34917 \begin_inset space ~
34925 \begin_inset space ~
34930 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34935 \begin_inset space \space{}
34938 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34942 \begin_layout Description
34946 \begin_inset space ~
34953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34962 PDF-format using the program
34966 , produces PDF-files directly
34969 \begin_layout Description
34973 \begin_inset space ~
34978 PDF-format using the program
34982 , produces PDF-files directly
34985 \begin_layout Description
34989 \begin_inset space ~
34994 PDF-format using the program
34998 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35001 \begin_layout Description
35005 \begin_inset space ~
35012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35021 PDF-format using the program
35025 , produces PDF-files directly
35028 \begin_layout Description
35032 \begin_inset space ~
35040 \begin_layout Description
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35048 \begin_inset space ~
35053 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35054 and then exported as text using the program
35059 \begin_layout Description
35064 PostScript format using the program
35069 \begin_layout Description
35070 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
35071 programming language
35084 it is possible to use
35091 \begin_layout Standard
35092 If one of the menu entries
35099 \begin_inset space ~
35108 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
35109 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
35110 \begin_inset space ~
35114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35116 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35121 \begin_inset Index idx
35124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35125 Reconfiguration of LyX
35133 \begin_layout Subsection
35137 \begin_layout Standard
35138 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
35139 format or send it to a printer.
35140 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
35141 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
35147 For more information have a look at section
35148 \begin_inset space ~
35152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35154 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
35161 \begin_layout Subsection
35165 \begin_layout Standard
35166 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35167 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
35168 prefix, see section
35169 \begin_inset space ~
35173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35175 reference "sec:Paths"
35180 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35189 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35190 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
35191 \begin_inset space ~
35195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35197 reference "sub:Converters"
35204 \begin_layout Subsection
35205 New and Close Window
35208 \begin_layout Standard
35209 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
35212 \begin_layout Subsection
35216 \begin_layout Standard
35217 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35220 \begin_layout Section
35222 \begin_inset Index idx
35225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35234 \begin_layout Subsection
35238 \begin_layout Standard
35239 Described in section
35240 \begin_inset space ~
35244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35246 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35253 \begin_layout Subsection
35254 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35257 \begin_layout Standard
35258 Described in section
35259 \begin_inset space ~
35263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35265 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35272 \begin_layout Subsection
35276 \begin_layout Standard
35277 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35278 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35281 \begin_layout Subsection
35285 \begin_layout Standard
35286 Selects the whole document.
35289 \begin_layout Subsection
35290 Find & Replace (Quick)
35293 \begin_layout Standard
35294 Described in section
35295 \begin_inset space ~
35299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35301 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35308 \begin_layout Subsection
35309 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35312 \begin_layout Standard
35313 Described in section
35314 \begin_inset space ~
35318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35320 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35327 \begin_layout Subsection
35328 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35331 \begin_layout Standard
35332 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35336 \begin_layout Subsection
35340 \begin_layout Standard
35341 Described in section
35342 \begin_inset space ~
35346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35348 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35355 \begin_layout Subsection
35357 \begin_inset Index idx
35360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35361 Paragraph ! Settings
35369 \begin_layout Standard
35370 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35371 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35375 \begin_layout Standard
35376 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35377 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35383 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35384 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35386 \begin_inset space ~
35394 \begin_layout Subsection
35398 \begin_layout Standard
35399 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35400 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35401 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35405 \begin_layout Standard
35406 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35408 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35409 The properties of tables are described in section
35410 \begin_inset space ~
35414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35416 reference "sec:Tables"
35420 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35421 \begin_inset space ~
35425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35427 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35434 \begin_layout Subsection
35435 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35438 \begin_layout Standard
35439 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35441 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35442 \begin_inset space ~
35446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35448 reference "sec:Nesting"
35453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35455 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35462 \begin_layout Subsection
35465 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35468 \begin_layout Standard
35469 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35470 nts of the same type.
35472 \begin_inset space ~
35476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35478 reference "sub:Separate-Nestings"
35482 for an explanation.
35485 \begin_layout Section
35487 \begin_inset Index idx
35490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35499 \begin_layout Standard
35500 At the bottom of the
35504 menu the opened documents are listed.
35507 \begin_layout Subsection
35508 Open/Close all Insets
35511 \begin_layout Standard
35512 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35515 \begin_layout Subsection
35516 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35519 \begin_layout Standard
35520 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35523 \begin_layout Standard
35524 Math macros are described in the
35531 \begin_layout Subsection
35535 \begin_layout Standard
35536 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35537 \begin_inset space ~
35541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35543 reference "sec:Navigating"
35548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35550 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35557 \begin_layout Subsection
35561 \begin_layout Standard
35562 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35564 \begin_inset space ~
35568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35570 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35577 \begin_layout Subsection
35581 \begin_layout Standard
35582 Opens a window showing console messages.
35583 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35587 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35588 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35591 \begin_layout Subsection
35593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35595 name "sub:Toolbars"
35600 \begin_inset Index idx
35603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35612 \begin_layout Standard
35613 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35614 All toolbars and the
35617 \begin_inset space ~
35622 can be turned on and off.
35627 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35639 \begin_inset space ~
35651 \begin_inset space ~
35656 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35660 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35667 \begin_layout Standard
35672 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35676 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35677 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35678 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35679 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35680 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35683 \begin_layout Standard
35684 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35691 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35698 \begin_layout Subsection
35702 \begin_layout Standard
35706 \begin_inset space ~
35710 \begin_inset space ~
35714 \begin_inset space ~
35718 \begin_inset space ~
35722 \begin_inset space ~
35726 \begin_inset space ~
35731 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35734 \begin_inset space ~
35738 \begin_inset space ~
35742 \begin_inset space ~
35746 \begin_inset space ~
35750 \begin_inset space ~
35754 \begin_inset space ~
35759 will split it horizontally.
35760 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35761 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35762 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35763 three or more documents at the same time.
35764 To close a split view, use the menu
35767 \begin_inset space ~
35771 \begin_inset space ~
35779 \begin_layout Subsection
35783 \begin_layout Standard
35784 Closes a split view.
35787 \begin_layout Subsection
35791 \begin_layout Standard
35792 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35793 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35794 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35795 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35796 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35799 \begin_layout Section
35801 \begin_inset Index idx
35804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35813 \begin_layout Subsection
35817 \begin_layout Standard
35818 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35819 \begin_inset space ~
35823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35825 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35836 \begin_layout Subsection
35838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35840 name "sub:Special-Character"
35847 \begin_layout Standard
35848 Here you can insert the following characters:
35851 \begin_layout Description
35856 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35858 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35859 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35860 You can get a complete display by checking
35863 \begin_inset space ~
35869 \begin_inset Newline newline
35873 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35881 Not all characters will be visible in the
35885 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35893 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35897 ) can display every character.
35905 \begin_layout Description
35906 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35910 \begin_layout Description
35912 \begin_inset space ~
35916 \begin_inset space ~
35919 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35920 \begin_inset space ~
35924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35926 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35933 \begin_layout Description
35935 \begin_inset space ~
35938 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35941 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35942 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35948 \begin_layout Description
35950 \begin_inset space ~
35953 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35956 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35957 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35963 \begin_layout Description
35965 \begin_inset space ~
35968 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35972 \begin_layout Description
35974 \begin_inset space ~
35977 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35981 \begin_layout Description
35983 \begin_inset space ~
35986 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35992 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35998 \begin_layout Description
36000 \begin_inset space ~
36003 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
36007 \begin_layout Description
36009 \begin_inset space ~
36013 \begin_inset Index idx
36016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36023 \begin_inset Index idx
36026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36027 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36032 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36033 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36035 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
36040 \begin_inset Index idx
36043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36044 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
36050 \begin_inset Newline newline
36053 More information about this feature can be found in the
36059 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36065 \begin_layout Subsection
36069 \begin_layout Standard
36070 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36073 \begin_layout Description
36074 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36075 \begin_inset script superscript
36077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36086 \begin_layout Description
36087 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36088 \begin_inset script subscript
36090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36099 \begin_layout Description
36101 \begin_inset space ~
36104 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36105 \begin_inset space ~
36109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36111 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
36118 \begin_layout Description
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36123 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36124 \begin_inset space ~
36128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36130 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
36137 \begin_layout Description
36139 \begin_inset space ~
36142 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36143 \begin_inset space ~
36147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36149 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
36156 \begin_layout Description
36158 \begin_inset space ~
36161 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36167 \begin_inset space \space{}
36170 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36171 An example from the LyX
36176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36179 To insert a fraction use the command
36184 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36188 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36197 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36204 \begin_layout Description
36206 \begin_inset space ~
36209 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36210 \begin_inset space ~
36214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36216 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
36223 \begin_layout Description
36225 \begin_inset space ~
36228 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36229 \begin_inset space ~
36233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36235 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
36242 \begin_layout Description
36244 \begin_inset space ~
36247 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36248 \begin_inset space ~
36252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36254 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36261 \begin_layout Description
36262 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36269 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36276 \begin_layout Description
36278 \begin_inset space ~
36281 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36282 \begin_inset space ~
36286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36288 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36295 \begin_layout Description
36297 \begin_inset space ~
36300 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36301 \begin_inset space ~
36305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36307 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36314 \begin_layout Description
36316 \begin_inset space ~
36320 \begin_inset space ~
36323 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36324 \begin_inset space ~
36328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36330 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36337 \begin_layout Description
36339 \begin_inset space ~
36342 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36343 as described in section
36344 \begin_inset space ~
36348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36350 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36357 \begin_layout Description
36359 \begin_inset space ~
36362 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36363 \begin_inset space ~
36367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36369 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36376 \begin_layout Description
36378 \begin_inset space ~
36381 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36382 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36384 \begin_inset space ~
36388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36390 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36397 \begin_layout Description
36399 \begin_inset space ~
36402 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36409 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36416 \begin_layout Description
36418 \begin_inset space ~
36422 \begin_inset space ~
36425 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36432 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36439 \begin_layout Subsection
36443 \begin_layout Standard
36444 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36448 \begin_inset space ~
36469 are described in section
36470 \begin_inset space ~
36474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36476 reference "sec:toc"
36485 is described in section
36486 \begin_inset space ~
36490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36492 reference "sec:Index"
36500 is described in section
36501 \begin_inset space ~
36505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36507 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36513 BibTeX Bibliography
36515 is described in section
36516 \begin_inset space ~
36520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36522 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36529 \begin_layout Subsection
36533 \begin_layout Standard
36534 To insert floats, as described in section
36535 \begin_inset space ~
36539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36541 reference "sec:Floats"
36545 and in detail the chapter
36552 \begin_inset space ~
36560 \begin_layout Subsection
36564 \begin_layout Standard
36565 To insert notes, described in section
36566 \begin_inset space ~
36570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36572 reference "sec:Notes"
36579 \begin_layout Subsection
36583 \begin_layout Standard
36584 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36586 Branches are described in section
36587 \begin_inset space ~
36591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36593 reference "sec:Branches"
36600 \begin_layout Subsection
36604 \begin_layout Standard
36605 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36606 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36608 An example is the document class
36609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36616 with three custom insets.
36619 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36623 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36629 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36632 \begin_layout Subsection
36634 \begin_inset Index idx
36637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36646 \begin_layout Standard
36647 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36649 For more information see chapter
36651 External Document Parts
36654 \begin_inset space ~
36660 \begin_layout Subsection
36662 \begin_inset Index idx
36665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36674 \begin_layout Standard
36675 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36676 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36683 \begin_inset space ~
36691 \begin_layout Subsection
36695 \begin_layout Standard
36700 dialog as described in section
36701 \begin_inset space ~
36705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36707 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36714 \begin_layout Subsection
36718 \begin_layout Standard
36723 as described in section
36724 \begin_inset space ~
36728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36730 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36737 \begin_layout Subsection
36741 \begin_layout Standard
36746 as described in section
36747 \begin_inset space ~
36751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36760 \begin_layout Subsection
36762 \begin_inset Index idx
36765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36772 \begin_inset Index idx
36775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36776 Longtables ! Caption
36784 \begin_layout Standard
36785 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36786 Floats are described in section
36787 \begin_inset space ~
36791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36793 reference "sec:Floats"
36797 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36804 \begin_inset space ~
36812 \begin_layout Subsection
36816 \begin_layout Standard
36817 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36818 \begin_inset space ~
36822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36824 reference "sec:Index"
36831 \begin_layout Subsection
36835 \begin_layout Standard
36836 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36837 \begin_inset space ~
36841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36843 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36850 \begin_layout Subsection
36854 \begin_layout Standard
36855 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36856 Tables are described in section
36857 \begin_inset space ~
36861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36863 reference "sec:Tables"
36867 and in detail in the chapter
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36882 \begin_layout Subsection
36886 \begin_layout Standard
36892 Graphics are described in section
36893 \begin_inset space ~
36897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36899 reference "sec:Graphics"
36906 \begin_layout Subsection
36910 \begin_layout Standard
36911 Inserts a URL as described in section
36912 \begin_inset space ~
36916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36918 reference "sub:URLs"
36925 \begin_layout Subsection
36929 \begin_layout Standard
36930 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36931 \begin_inset space ~
36935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36937 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36944 \begin_layout Subsection
36948 \begin_layout Standard
36949 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36950 \begin_inset space ~
36954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36956 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36963 \begin_layout Subsection
36967 \begin_layout Standard
36968 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36969 \begin_inset space ~
36973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36975 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36982 \begin_layout Subsection
36986 \begin_layout Standard
36987 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36988 title or caption of a float.
36989 Inserts a short title as described in section
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36996 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37003 \begin_layout Subsection
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37008 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
37009 \begin_inset space ~
37013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37015 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37022 \begin_layout Subsection
37024 \begin_inset Index idx
37027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37036 \begin_layout Standard
37037 Inserts a program listings box.
37038 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37040 Program Code Listings
37045 \begin_inset space ~
37053 \begin_layout Subsection
37057 \begin_layout Standard
37058 Inserts the actual date.
37059 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37061 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37069 \begin_inset space ~
37077 \begin_layout Subsection
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37082 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37083 \begin_inset space ~
37087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37089 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37096 \begin_layout Section
37098 \begin_inset Index idx
37101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37110 \begin_layout Standard
37111 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37112 \begin_inset space ~
37115 of the current document.
37116 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37119 \begin_layout Subsection
37123 \begin_layout Standard
37124 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37125 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37126 to jump, for example, between section
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37131 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37132 \begin_inset space ~
37135 2.5 and use the submenu
37138 \begin_inset space ~
37142 \begin_inset space ~
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37155 \begin_inset space ~
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37165 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37169 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37175 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37178 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37181 \begin_layout Standard
37182 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37186 \begin_inset space ~
37191 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37199 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37202 \begin_layout Subsection
37203 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37206 \begin_layout Standard
37207 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37211 \begin_layout Subsection
37215 \begin_layout Standard
37216 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37217 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37218 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37222 \begin_inset space ~
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37234 \begin_layout Subsection
37238 \begin_layout Standard
37239 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37242 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37244 \begin_inset space ~
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37257 manual for a detailed description.
37260 \begin_layout Section
37262 \begin_inset Index idx
37265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37274 \begin_layout Subsection
37278 \begin_layout Standard
37279 Change Tracking is described in section
37280 \begin_inset space ~
37284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37286 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37293 \begin_layout Subsection
37298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37308 \begin_layout Standard
37309 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37311 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37312 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37313 to the clipboard or update the view.
37314 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37317 \begin_layout Subsection
37318 Start Appendix Here
37321 \begin_layout Standard
37322 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37323 as described in section
37324 \begin_inset space ~
37328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37330 reference "sec:Appendices"
37337 \begin_layout Subsection
37339 \begin_inset space ~
37345 \begin_layout Standard
37346 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37347 default output format for the document (menu
37349 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37350 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37351 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37353 \begin_inset space ~
37357 \begin_inset space ~
37363 \begin_inset space ~
37367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37369 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37373 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37375 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37376 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37381 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37383 \begin_inset space ~
37386 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37388 \begin_inset space ~
37392 \begin_inset space ~
37398 \begin_inset space ~
37402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37404 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37408 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37409 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37411 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37412 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37414 \begin_inset space ~
37417 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37419 \begin_inset space ~
37422 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37426 \begin_inset space ~
37430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37432 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37437 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37438 The default output format is
37441 \begin_inset space ~
37449 \begin_layout Subsection
37450 View (Other Formats)
37453 \begin_layout Standard
37454 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37455 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37456 actual document with an external program.
37457 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37458 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37459 All possible formats are listed in section
37460 \begin_inset space ~
37464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37466 reference "sub:Export"
37471 You should at least see the menu entry
37476 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37477 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37478 \begin_inset space ~
37482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37484 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37489 \begin_inset Index idx
37492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37493 Reconfiguration of LyX
37501 \begin_layout Standard
37502 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37503 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37505 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37506 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37508 \begin_inset space ~
37511 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37513 \begin_inset space ~
37516 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37520 \begin_inset space ~
37524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37526 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37531 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37534 \begin_layout Subsection
37536 \begin_inset space ~
37542 \begin_layout Standard
37543 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37544 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37547 \begin_layout Subsection
37548 Update (Other Formats)
37551 \begin_layout Standard
37552 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37553 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37556 \begin_layout Subsection
37557 View Master Document
37560 \begin_layout Standard
37561 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37577 \begin_inset space ~
37582 manual for more information on this topic).
37583 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37584 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37588 \begin_inset space ~
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37597 generates the output of the whole book, while
37601 will just output the chapter alone.
37604 \begin_layout Standard
37605 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37606 in the document settings (menu
37608 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37609 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37610 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37612 \begin_inset space ~
37616 \begin_inset space ~
37622 \begin_inset space ~
37626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37628 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37632 ) or in the preferences (menu
37634 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37635 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37637 \begin_inset space ~
37640 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37642 \begin_inset space ~
37645 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37647 \begin_inset space ~
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37657 \begin_inset space ~
37661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37663 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37670 \begin_layout Subsection
37671 Update Master Document
37674 \begin_layout Standard
37675 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37691 \begin_inset space ~
37696 manual for more information on this topic).
37697 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37698 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37701 \begin_layout Standard
37702 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37703 in the document settings (menu
37705 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37706 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37707 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37709 \begin_inset space ~
37713 \begin_inset space ~
37719 \begin_inset space ~
37723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37725 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37729 ) or in the preferences (menu
37731 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37732 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37734 \begin_inset space ~
37737 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37739 \begin_inset space ~
37742 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37744 \begin_inset space ~
37748 \begin_inset space ~
37754 \begin_inset space ~
37758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37760 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37767 \begin_layout Subsection
37771 \begin_layout Standard
37772 Un/compresses the current document.
37775 \begin_layout Subsection
37779 \begin_layout Standard
37780 The document settings are described in appendix
37781 \begin_inset space ~
37785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37787 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37794 \begin_layout Section
37796 \begin_inset Index idx
37799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37808 \begin_layout Subsection
37812 \begin_layout Standard
37813 Spell checking is explained in section
37814 \begin_inset space ~
37818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37820 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37827 \begin_layout Subsection
37831 \begin_layout Standard
37832 The thesaurus is described in section
37833 \begin_inset space ~
37837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37839 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37846 \begin_layout Subsection
37848 \begin_inset Index idx
37851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37858 \begin_inset Index idx
37861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37870 \begin_layout Standard
37871 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37872 the highlighted document part.
37875 \begin_layout Subsection
37880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37888 \begin_inset Index idx
37891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37900 \begin_layout Standard
37901 Generates with the help of the program
37905 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37906 This feature is not available on Windows.
37909 \begin_layout Subsection
37914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37922 \begin_inset Index idx
37925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37934 \begin_layout Standard
37935 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37940 \begin_inset space ~
37945 to see the full filename paths.
37948 \begin_layout Subsection
37950 \begin_inset Index idx
37953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37962 \begin_layout Standard
37963 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37964 \begin_inset space ~
37968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37970 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37977 \begin_layout Subsection
37979 \begin_inset Index idx
37982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37983 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37994 Reconfiguration of LyX
37998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38011 \begin_inset Index idx
38014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38015 Reconfiguration of LyX
38023 \begin_layout Standard
38024 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
38025 needs; see also section
38026 \begin_inset space ~
38030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38032 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38039 \begin_layout Subsection
38043 \begin_layout Standard
38048 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38049 \begin_inset space ~
38053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38055 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38062 \begin_layout Section
38064 \begin_inset Index idx
38067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38076 \begin_layout Standard
38077 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
38079 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38083 \begin_layout Standard
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38092 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
38093 found by LyX (see also section
38094 \begin_inset space ~
38098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38100 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38107 \begin_layout Standard
38111 \begin_inset space ~
38118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38127 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
38131 \begin_layout Section
38133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38135 name "sec:Toolbars"
38142 \begin_layout Standard
38143 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38144 \begin_inset space ~
38148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38150 reference "sub:Toolbars"
38157 \begin_layout Standard
38158 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38159 This is described in the
38161 Additional Features
38166 \begin_layout Subsection
38168 \begin_inset Index idx
38171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38180 \begin_layout Standard
38181 \begin_inset Graphics
38182 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38190 \begin_layout Standard
38191 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38197 \begin_layout Standard
38198 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38215 \begin_inset Note Note
38218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38219 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38224 manual for more information.
38232 \begin_layout Standard
38233 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38239 \begin_layout Standard
38240 \begin_inset Tabular
38241 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38242 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38243 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38244 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38250 \begin_inset Graphics
38251 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38265 pull-down box for the environments
38278 \begin_layout Standard
38279 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38285 \begin_layout Standard
38287 \begin_inset Tabular
38288 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38289 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38290 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38291 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38315 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38345 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38375 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38391 arg "dialog-show print"
38399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38405 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38421 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38435 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38465 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38502 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38525 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38555 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38585 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38601 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38615 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38641 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38655 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38683 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38697 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38698 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38705 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38726 Emphasize text, function of the
38728 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38730 \begin_inset space ~
38733 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38763 Set text to noun style, function of the
38765 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38770 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38788 arg "textstyle-apply"
38796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38800 Format text using the current settings in the
38802 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38807 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38839 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38840 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38842 \begin_inset space ~
38851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38860 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38874 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38888 arg "tabular-insert"
38896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38918 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38930 Toggle outline window on/off,
38932 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38939 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38948 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38960 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38975 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38987 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39000 \begin_layout Subsection
39002 \begin_inset Index idx
39005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39014 \begin_layout Standard
39015 \begin_inset Graphics
39016 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39024 \begin_layout Standard
39025 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39031 \begin_layout Standard
39032 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39036 \begin_layout Standard
39037 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39043 \begin_layout Standard
39044 \begin_inset Tabular
39045 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39046 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39047 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39048 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39085 arg "layout Enumerate"
39093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39112 arg "layout Itemize"
39120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39130 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39166 arg "layout Description"
39174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39193 arg "depth-increment"
39201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39207 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39209 \begin_inset space ~
39213 \begin_inset space ~
39222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39231 arg "depth-decrement"
39239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39245 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39247 \begin_inset space ~
39251 \begin_inset space ~
39260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39269 arg "float-insert figure"
39277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39283 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39284 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39300 arg "float-insert table"
39308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39314 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39315 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39345 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39361 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39375 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39391 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39405 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39435 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39437 \begin_inset space ~
39446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39455 arg "nomencl-insert"
39463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39469 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39471 \begin_inset space ~
39480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39489 arg "footnote-insert"
39497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39503 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39510 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39519 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39533 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39535 \begin_inset space ~
39544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39567 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39568 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 \begin_inset space ~
39590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39599 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39613 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39643 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39650 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39673 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39690 \begin_inset space ~
39699 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39708 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39722 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39723 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39739 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39753 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39754 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39756 \begin_inset space ~
39765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39774 arg "dialog-show character"
39782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39788 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39790 \begin_inset space ~
39793 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39809 arg "layout-paragraph"
39817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39823 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39825 \begin_inset space ~
39834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39843 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39857 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39871 \begin_layout Subsection
39872 View/Update Toolbar
39873 \begin_inset Index idx
39876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39877 Toolbar ! View / Update
39885 \begin_layout Standard
39886 \begin_inset Graphics
39887 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39894 \begin_layout Standard
39895 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39901 \begin_layout Standard
39902 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39906 \begin_layout Standard
39907 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39913 \begin_layout Standard
39914 \begin_inset Tabular
39915 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39916 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39917 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39918 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39919 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39942 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39949 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39958 arg "buffer-update"
39966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39972 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39979 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39988 arg "master-buffer-view"
39996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40002 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40022 arg "master-buffer-update"
40030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40036 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40038 \begin_inset space ~
40042 \begin_inset space ~
40051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40060 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40074 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40075 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40076 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40077 Synchronize with Output
40083 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40088 \begin_inset Graphics
40089 filename ../images/view-others.png
40091 groupId toolbarbuttons
40102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40108 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40109 View (Other Formats)
40115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40120 \begin_inset Graphics
40121 filename ../images/update-others.png
40123 groupId toolbarbuttons
40132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40138 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40139 Update (Other Formats)
40152 \begin_layout Standard
40153 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40157 \begin_layout Subsection
40161 \begin_layout Standard
40162 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40163 \begin_inset space ~
40167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40169 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40173 , the table toolbar
40174 \begin_inset Index idx
40177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40186 \begin_inset space ~
40191 manual and the math macro toolbar
40192 \begin_inset Index idx
40195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40208 \begin_layout Chapter
40209 The Document Settings
40210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40212 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40217 \begin_inset Index idx
40220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40221 Document ! Settings
40229 \begin_layout Standard
40233 \begin_inset space ~
40238 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40239 is called with the menu
40241 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40245 You can save your document settings as default with the
40247 Save as Document Defaults
40249 button in any dialog.
40250 This will create a template named
40254 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40258 \begin_layout Standard
40263 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40264 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40267 \begin_layout Standard
40268 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40269 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40270 to find the one you are looking for.
40271 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40272 the submenus of the dialog.
40274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40278 \begin_inset space \space{}
40282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40289 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40290 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40291 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40294 \begin_layout Section
40298 \begin_layout Standard
40299 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40301 Document classes are described in section
40302 \begin_inset space ~
40306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40308 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40316 \begin_layout Standard
40320 \begin_inset space ~
40325 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40329 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40330 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40332 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40341 \begin_layout Standard
40342 Some classes use special class options by default.
40343 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40347 and you can decide to use them or not.
40348 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40349 recommended you leave them untouched.
40354 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40359 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40360 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40366 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40367 \begin_inset Newline newline
40372 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40375 \begin_inset Newline newline
40378 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40384 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40386 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40398 \begin_layout Standard
40403 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40404 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40405 document is opened without its master.
40406 This way child documents are always compilable.
40407 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40414 \begin_inset space ~
40422 \begin_layout Standard
40423 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40433 \begin_inset Index idx
40436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40437 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40443 \begin_inset Index idx
40446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40447 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40452 for cross-references, see section
40453 \begin_inset space ~
40457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40459 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40466 \begin_layout Section
40470 \begin_layout Standard
40471 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40472 Please refer to the section
40475 \begin_inset space ~
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40488 manual for details.
40491 \begin_layout Section
40495 \begin_layout Standard
40496 Modules are explained in section
40497 \begin_inset space ~
40501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40503 reference "sub:Modules"
40510 \begin_layout Section
40514 \begin_layout Standard
40516 \begin_inset space ~
40520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40522 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40529 \begin_layout Section
40533 \begin_layout Standard
40534 The document font settings are described in section
40535 \begin_inset space ~
40539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40541 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40548 \begin_layout Section
40552 \begin_layout Standard
40553 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40565 \begin_inset space ~
40570 and whether it should be a
40573 \begin_inset space ~
40578 can also be specified here.
40581 \begin_layout Standard
40582 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40584 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40586 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40589 \begin_layout Standard
40592 Use justification in LyX work area
40594 you can decide if LyX justifies the text on screen.
40595 This only affects the text inside LyX not in the output.
40598 \begin_layout Section
40602 \begin_layout Standard
40603 This dialog is described in sections
40604 \begin_inset space ~
40608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40610 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40617 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40624 \begin_layout Section
40628 \begin_layout Standard
40629 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40630 \begin_inset space ~
40634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40636 reference "sub:Margins"
40643 \begin_layout Section
40645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40647 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40652 \begin_inset Index idx
40655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40656 Language ! Encoding
40664 \begin_layout Standard
40665 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40666 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40667 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40668 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40669 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40670 known for a particular character).
40673 \begin_layout Standard
40674 If you use the option
40678 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40679 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40680 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40681 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40682 exactly one encoding.
40683 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40686 \begin_layout Standard
40687 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40688 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40689 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40690 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40691 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40692 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40697 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40698 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40699 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40700 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40701 engines to standard LaTeX.
40702 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40703 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40706 \begin_inset space ~
40713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40725 \begin_inset space ~
40732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40744 \begin_inset space ~
40750 \begin_inset space ~
40754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40756 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40761 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40765 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40768 \begin_layout Standard
40772 \begin_inset space ~
40777 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40787 The possible settings are:
40790 \begin_layout Description
40791 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40793 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40794 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40798 \begin_inset space ~
40802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40804 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40811 \begin_layout Description
40812 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40813 format you will use.
40814 In many cases this will be
40819 \begin_inset Index idx
40822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40823 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40829 If the newer package
40834 \begin_inset Index idx
40837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40838 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40843 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40844 this package will be used instead of
40851 \begin_layout Description
40853 \begin_inset space ~
40864 would be more appropriate.
40867 \begin_layout Description
40868 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40869 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40873 (for German texts), type in
40876 \begin_inset Newline newline
40881 usepackage{ngerman}
40884 \begin_layout Description
40885 None will not use a language package.
40886 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40889 \begin_layout Standard
40890 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40893 \begin_layout Description
40895 \begin_inset space ~
40899 \begin_inset space ~
40903 \begin_inset space ~
40910 , but the LaTeX-package
40915 \begin_inset Index idx
40918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40919 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40925 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40926 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40927 languages in TeX code.
40930 \begin_layout Description
40931 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40932 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40933 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40936 \begin_layout Description
40938 \begin_inset space ~
40942 \begin_inset space ~
40945 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40948 \begin_layout Description
40950 \begin_inset space ~
40954 \begin_inset space ~
40957 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40960 \begin_layout Description
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40965 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40968 \begin_layout Description
40970 \begin_inset space ~
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40977 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40978 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40981 \begin_layout Description
40983 \begin_inset space ~
40987 \begin_inset space ~
40990 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40994 \begin_layout Description
40996 \begin_inset space ~
41000 \begin_inset space ~
41003 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41004 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41007 \begin_layout Description
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41013 \begin_inset space ~
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41020 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41027 \begin_layout Description
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41033 \begin_inset space ~
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41040 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41041 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41044 \begin_layout Description
41046 \begin_inset space ~
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41053 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41054 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41055 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41056 \begin_inset space ~
41060 \begin_inset space ~
41066 \begin_layout Description
41068 \begin_inset space ~
41072 \begin_inset space ~
41075 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41076 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41077 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
41078 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41079 \begin_inset space ~
41083 \begin_inset space ~
41089 \begin_layout Description
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41095 \begin_inset space ~
41098 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41101 \begin_layout Description
41103 \begin_inset space ~
41107 \begin_inset space ~
41110 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41113 \begin_layout Description
41115 \begin_inset space ~
41119 \begin_inset space ~
41122 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41125 \begin_layout Description
41127 \begin_inset space ~
41130 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41133 \begin_layout Description
41135 \begin_inset space ~
41138 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41141 \begin_layout Description
41143 \begin_inset space ~
41147 \begin_inset space ~
41150 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41153 \begin_layout Description
41155 \begin_inset space ~
41159 \begin_inset space ~
41165 \begin_layout Description
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41174 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41177 \begin_layout Description
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41183 \begin_inset space ~
41189 \begin_layout Description
41191 \begin_inset space ~
41195 \begin_inset space ~
41198 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41203 \begin_inset Index idx
41206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41207 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41212 , when using this, set the document language to
41217 \begin_layout Description
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41226 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41230 , when using this, set the document language to
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41239 \begin_layout Description
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41245 \begin_inset space ~
41248 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41253 \begin_inset Index idx
41256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41257 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41262 , when using this, set the document language to
41267 \begin_layout Description
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41276 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41280 , when using this, set the document language to
41285 \begin_layout Description
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41294 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41298 , when using this, set the document language to
41303 \begin_layout Description
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41308 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41311 \begin_layout Description
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41317 \begin_inset space ~
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41324 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41327 \begin_layout Description
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41340 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41341 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41342 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41345 \begin_layout Description
41347 \begin_inset space ~
41351 \begin_inset space ~
41357 \begin_layout Description
41359 \begin_inset space ~
41363 \begin_inset space ~
41366 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41367 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41370 \begin_layout Description
41372 \begin_inset space ~
41376 \begin_inset space ~
41379 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41384 \begin_inset Index idx
41387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41388 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41393 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41396 \begin_layout Description
41398 \begin_inset space ~
41402 \begin_inset space ~
41405 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41413 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41418 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41420 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41423 \begin_layout Description
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41429 \begin_inset space ~
41432 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41437 \begin_inset Index idx
41440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41441 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41446 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41449 \begin_layout Description
41451 \begin_inset space ~
41454 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41459 \begin_inset Index idx
41462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41463 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41469 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41473 \begin_layout Description
41475 \begin_inset space ~
41479 \begin_inset space ~
41483 \begin_inset space ~
41486 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41487 \begin_inset space ~
41493 \begin_layout Description
41495 \begin_inset space ~
41499 \begin_inset space ~
41503 \begin_inset space ~
41506 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41507 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41508 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41512 \begin_layout Description
41514 \begin_inset space ~
41518 \begin_inset space ~
41522 \begin_inset space ~
41525 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41526 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41529 \begin_layout Section
41531 \begin_inset Index idx
41534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41541 \begin_inset Index idx
41544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41551 \begin_inset Index idx
41554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41555 Color ! Shaded boxes
41561 \begin_inset Index idx
41564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41565 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41573 \begin_layout Standard
41574 Here you can alter the font color for the
41578 (default: black), for
41581 \begin_inset space ~
41586 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41590 (default: white) and for
41593 \begin_inset space ~
41603 sets the color back to the default.
41606 \begin_layout Standard
41607 Clicking any button showing
41615 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41616 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41617 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41618 later more quickly.
41621 \begin_layout Standard
41622 Note, if you change the
41625 \begin_inset space ~
41630 font color and use the option
41633 \begin_inset space ~
41638 in the document settings under
41641 \begin_inset space ~
41646 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41647 \begin_inset space ~
41651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41653 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41660 \begin_layout Standard
41661 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41667 \begin_layout Standard
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41680 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41682 \begin_inset space ~
41685 Code after a forced page break:
41688 \begin_layout Itemize
41689 For the page color:
41690 \begin_inset Newline newline
41697 pagecolor{color name}
41700 \begin_layout Itemize
41701 For the text color:
41702 \begin_inset Newline newline
41712 \begin_layout Standard
41713 You are restricted to one of
41749 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41762 \begin_inset Newline newline
41765 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41766 names to refer to them:
41769 \begin_layout Itemize
41775 \begin_inset Newline newline
41780 page_backgroundcolor
41783 \begin_layout Itemize
41787 \begin_inset space ~
41793 \begin_inset Newline newline
41801 \begin_layout Itemize
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41811 \begin_inset Newline newline
41819 \begin_layout Itemize
41823 \begin_inset space ~
41829 \begin_inset Newline newline
41837 \begin_layout Standard
41838 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41841 \begin_inset space ~
41849 \begin_inset space ~
41857 \begin_layout Section
41861 \begin_layout Standard
41862 Here you can adjust the
41866 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41870 as described in section
41871 \begin_inset space ~
41875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41877 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41884 \begin_layout Section
41888 \begin_layout Standard
41889 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41894 \begin_inset Index idx
41897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41898 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41908 \begin_inset Index idx
41911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41912 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41920 Sectioned bibliography
41922 using the LaTeX package
41927 \begin_inset Index idx
41930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41931 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41936 and you can select a
41940 for the generation of the bibliography.
41941 For a further description see section
41942 \begin_inset space ~
41946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41948 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41955 \begin_layout Section
41959 \begin_layout Standard
41960 Here you can define the
41964 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41966 \begin_inset space ~
41970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41972 reference "sec:Index"
41979 \begin_layout Section
41983 \begin_layout Standard
41984 The PDF properties are explained in section
41985 \begin_inset space ~
41989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41991 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41998 \begin_layout Section
42002 \begin_layout Standard
42003 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
42008 \begin_inset Index idx
42011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42012 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
42022 \begin_inset Index idx
42025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42026 LaTeX-packages ! amssymb
42036 \begin_inset Index idx
42039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42040 LaTeX-packages ! cancel
42050 \begin_inset Index idx
42053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42054 LaTeX-packages ! esint
42064 \begin_inset Index idx
42067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42068 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
42078 \begin_inset Index idx
42081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42082 LaTeX-packages ! mathtools
42092 \begin_inset Index idx
42095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42096 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
42106 \begin_inset Index idx
42109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42110 LaTeX-packages ! stackrel
42120 \begin_inset Index idx
42123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42124 LaTeX-packages ! stmaryrd
42134 \begin_inset Index idx
42137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42138 LaTeX-packages ! undertilde
42143 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42146 \begin_layout Description
42147 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
42148 ensure that you have this enabled.
42151 \begin_layout Description
42152 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42153 letters, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas, ensure that you have
42157 \begin_layout Description
42158 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42161 \begin_inset space ~
42173 \begin_layout Description
42174 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42177 \begin_inset space ~
42189 \begin_layout Description
42190 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42201 \begin_layout Description
42202 mathtools is used for the math commands
42238 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42245 \begin_layout Description
42246 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42248 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42257 \begin_layout Description
42258 stackrel is used for the math command
42275 \begin_layout Description
42276 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42279 \begin_layout Description
42280 undertilde is used for the math command
42288 Accents for one Character
42297 \begin_layout Section
42301 \begin_layout Standard
42302 The float placement options are described in the section
42305 \begin_inset space ~
42313 \begin_inset space ~
42321 \begin_layout Section
42325 \begin_layout Standard
42326 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42328 Program Code Listings
42333 \begin_inset space ~
42341 \begin_layout Section
42345 \begin_layout Standard
42346 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42354 set to be used and set the
42359 The itemize environment is described in section
42360 \begin_inset space ~
42364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42366 reference "sec:Itemize"
42373 \begin_layout Standard
42374 You can furthermore specify a
42377 \begin_inset space ~
42382 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
42383 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42390 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42396 \begin_inset space \space{}
42400 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42410 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42411 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42414 \begin_layout Standard
42415 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42423 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42426 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42427 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42429 \begin_inset space ~
42435 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42439 usepackage{textcomp}
42442 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42446 usepackage{amssymb}
42456 \begin_layout Section
42460 \begin_layout Standard
42461 Branches are described in section
42462 \begin_inset space ~
42466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42468 reference "sec:Branches"
42475 \begin_layout Section
42477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42479 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42486 \begin_layout Standard
42487 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42490 \begin_layout Description
42492 \begin_inset space ~
42496 \begin_inset space ~
42499 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42519 View Master Document
42520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42527 Update Master Document
42528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42535 menu or the toolbar.
42536 The default is set in
42538 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42539 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42541 \begin_inset space ~
42544 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42548 \begin_inset space ~
42552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42554 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42561 \begin_layout Description
42563 \begin_inset space ~
42567 \begin_inset space ~
42570 Output settings for the menu
42572 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42574 \begin_inset space ~
42580 For a detailed description see section
42582 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42587 \begin_inset space ~
42595 \begin_layout Description
42597 \begin_inset space ~
42601 \begin_inset space ~
42604 Options offers settings for the export format
42610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42623 \begin_inset space ~
42628 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42629 \begin_inset space ~
42632 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42641 settings are described in detail in section
42643 Math Output in XHTML
42648 \begin_inset space ~
42657 \begin_inset space ~
42661 \begin_inset space ~
42666 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42669 \begin_layout Section
42674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42684 \begin_layout Standard
42685 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42686 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42687 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42688 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42692 \begin_layout Standard
42693 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42694 \begin_inset space ~
42698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42700 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42707 \begin_layout Chapter
42713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42715 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42720 \begin_inset Index idx
42723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42735 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42739 It has the following submenus.
42742 \begin_layout Section
42746 \begin_layout Subsection
42750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42751 User Interface File
42752 \begin_inset Index idx
42755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42756 Customization ! of toolbars
42762 \begin_inset Index idx
42765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42766 Customization ! of menus
42774 \begin_layout Standard
42775 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42776 interface (ui) file.
42777 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42785 \begin_layout Description
42790 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42793 \begin_layout Description
42800 the menu entries in popup context menus
42803 \begin_layout Description
42808 specifies the toolbar buttons
42811 \begin_layout Standard
42812 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42813 and edit the entries.
42816 \begin_layout Standard
42817 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42829 entries must be finished with an explicit
42854 and in the case of the
42855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42867 The syntax for the entries is:
42870 \begin_layout Standard
42871 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42899 \begin_layout Standard
42901 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42904 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42906 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42919 \begin_inset space ~
42927 \begin_layout Standard
42928 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42934 \begin_layout Standard
42935 For example, assuming you use the menu
42937 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42940 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42944 \begin_layout Standard
42945 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42969 \begin_layout Standard
42971 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42986 to have the sixth bookmark.
42989 \begin_layout Standard
42993 \begin_inset space ~
42998 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42999 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43000 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43003 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43010 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43014 \begin_layout Standard
43017 Enable tool tips in main work area
43019 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43027 \begin_layout Standard
43032 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
43035 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43037 \begin_inset space ~
43045 \begin_layout Subsection
43049 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43053 \begin_layout Standard
43056 Restore window layouts and geometries
43058 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
43059 in the last LyX session.
43062 \begin_layout Standard
43065 Restore cursor positions
43067 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43071 \begin_layout Standard
43074 Load opened files from last session
43076 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
43079 \begin_layout Standard
43082 Clear all session information
43084 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
43085 of last opened documents, etc.).
43088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43092 name "sub:Backup documents"
43097 \begin_inset Index idx
43100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43109 \begin_layout Standard
43112 Backup original documents when saving
43114 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43115 it was saved the last time.
43116 It is stored in the
43119 \begin_inset space ~
43125 \begin_inset space ~
43129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43131 reference "sec:Paths"
43135 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43138 \begin_inset space ~
43144 The backup file has the file extension
43145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43159 \begin_layout Standard
43162 Backup documents, every
43164 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43167 \begin_layout Standard
43170 Save documents compressed by default
43172 always saves files in a compressed format.
43175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43176 Windows & work area
43179 \begin_layout Standard
43182 Open documents in tabs
43184 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
43187 \begin_layout Standard
43192 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
43196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43204 reference "sec:Paths"
43208 for information about LyXServer pipes.
43214 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
43216 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
43219 \begin_layout Standard
43222 Single close-tab button
43224 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43227 \begin_inset Graphics
43228 filename ../images/closetab.png
43235 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43236 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43239 \begin_layout Standard
43240 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43248 For this option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
43256 \begin_layout Standard
43261 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43263 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43265 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43269 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43270 instances of LyX and only want to close the view in once instance.
43273 \begin_layout Subsection
43275 \begin_inset Index idx
43278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43287 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
43294 \begin_layout Standard
43295 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
43298 \begin_layout Standard
43299 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43307 This section only deals with the fonts
43312 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43315 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43316 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43327 \begin_layout Standard
43328 By default, LyX uses
43344 (depends on the system) as its
43347 \begin_inset space ~
43363 \begin_layout Standard
43364 You can change the font size with the
43371 \begin_layout Standard
43376 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43381 points have the size of 1
43382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43386 \begin_inset space ~
43390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43392 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43397 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43402 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43403 \begin_inset space ~
43407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43409 reference "sub:Document-Font"
43416 \begin_layout Standard
43419 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43421 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
43422 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43423 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43424 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43426 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43427 \begin_inset space ~
43433 \begin_layout Subsection
43435 \begin_inset Index idx
43438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43445 \begin_inset Index idx
43448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43457 \begin_layout Standard
43458 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43459 the list and selecting the
43466 \begin_layout Standard
43467 By checking the option
43471 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43474 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43475 \begin_inset space ~
43479 \begin_inset space ~
43484 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43487 \begin_layout Subsection
43489 \begin_inset Index idx
43492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43501 \begin_layout Standard
43502 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43505 \begin_layout Standard
43510 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43511 This feature is described in section
43512 \begin_inset space ~
43516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43518 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43525 \begin_layout Standard
43526 Checking the option
43529 \begin_inset space ~
43533 \begin_inset space ~
43537 \begin_inset space ~
43542 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43545 \begin_layout Section
43547 \begin_inset Index idx
43550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43559 \begin_layout Subsection
43563 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43567 \begin_layout Standard
43570 Cursor follows scrollbar
43572 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43576 \begin_layout Standard
43577 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43578 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43579 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43582 \begin_layout Standard
43585 Scroll below end of document
43587 is self-explanatory.
43590 \begin_layout Standard
43591 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43598 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43600 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43601 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43604 \begin_layout Standard
43607 Sort environments alphabetically
43609 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43612 \begin_layout Standard
43615 Group environments by their category
43617 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43620 \begin_layout Standard
43625 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43636 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43640 \begin_layout Standard
43641 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43646 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43647 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43651 \begin_layout Subsection
43653 \begin_inset Index idx
43656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43663 \begin_inset Index idx
43666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43667 Settings ! Shortcuts
43675 \begin_layout Standard
43680 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43681 Several binding files are available, among them:
43684 \begin_layout Description
43685 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43688 \begin_layout Description
43689 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43701 \begin_layout Description
43702 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43713 \begin_layout Standard
43714 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43719 , and binding files for special languages.
43720 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43725 \begin_inset space \space{}
43729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43737 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43741 \begin_layout Standard
43742 Some binding files, like
43746 , only have a limited scope.
43747 When looking at the end of the file
43751 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43754 \begin_layout Standard
43758 \begin_inset space ~
43762 \begin_inset space ~
43767 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43768 in the selected key binding file.
43771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43775 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43780 \begin_inset Index idx
43783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43784 Key Bindings ! Editing
43792 \begin_layout Standard
43793 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43794 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43795 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43798 Show key-bindings containing
43801 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43802 Insert there for example as keyword
43803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43810 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43811 functions that contain
43812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43820 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43821 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43825 that you will find in the
43832 \begin_layout Standard
43833 For example, to add the shortcut
43841 , select the function and press the
43846 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43847 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43850 \begin_layout Standard
43851 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43852 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43853 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43854 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43855 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43860 \begin_layout Standard
43861 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43864 \begin_layout Standard
43865 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43867 The syntax of the entries is:
43870 \begin_layout Standard
43876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43894 \begin_layout Subsection
43896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43898 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43903 \begin_inset Index idx
43906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43913 \begin_inset Index idx
43916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43917 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43925 \begin_layout Standard
43926 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43927 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43928 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43929 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43932 \begin_inset space ~
43936 \begin_inset space ~
43941 and select the keyboard map file named
43948 \begin_layout Standard
43957 keyboard map and, if you use the
43961 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43964 arg "keymap-primary"
43970 arg "keymap-secondary"
43973 respectively or toggle between them with
43976 arg "keymap-toggle"
43982 \begin_layout Standard
43983 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43991 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44000 \begin_layout Standard
44001 You can also specify the mouse
44003 Wheel scrolling speed
44006 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44010 \begin_layout Standard
44018 \begin_inset space ~
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44027 you can select a key for zooming.
44028 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44031 \begin_layout Subsection
44035 \begin_layout Standard
44036 Input completion is described in section
44037 \begin_inset space ~
44041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44043 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44050 \begin_layout Section
44052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44059 \begin_inset Index idx
44062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44069 \begin_inset Index idx
44072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44081 \begin_layout Standard
44082 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
44084 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44087 \begin_layout Description
44089 \begin_inset space ~
44092 directory This is LyX's working directory.
44093 It is the default when you
44104 \begin_inset space ~
44112 \begin_layout Description
44114 \begin_inset space ~
44117 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44119 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44133 \begin_layout Description
44135 \begin_inset space ~
44138 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44144 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44148 \begin_inset Newline newline
44152 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44164 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44172 \begin_layout Description
44174 \begin_inset space ~
44178 \begin_inset Index idx
44181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44187 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44188 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44189 \begin_inset space ~
44193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44195 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44203 will be used to save the backups.
44204 \begin_inset Newline newline
44207 Backup files have the ending
44208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44218 \begin_layout Description
44223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44231 \begin_inset space ~
44234 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44235 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
44236 \begin_inset Newline newline
44243 You add a BibTeX-database
44248 You can edit this file with the program
44257 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44266 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44271 and click on the LyX-symbol.
44272 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44278 and LyX need to be running the same time.
44279 \begin_inset Newline newline
44282 The pipe is also used for the
44287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44293 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44298 \begin_inset Newline newline
44301 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44302 \begin_inset Newline newline
44318 \begin_layout Description
44320 \begin_inset space ~
44323 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44326 \begin_layout Description
44328 \begin_inset space ~
44331 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44332 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44333 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44336 \begin_layout Description
44338 \begin_inset space ~
44341 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44347 You only need to specify it if you are using
44351 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44357 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44361 \begin_layout Description
44363 \begin_inset space ~
44366 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44367 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
44368 where to find it on the system.
44369 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
44370 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44379 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44380 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44383 \begin_layout Description
44385 \begin_inset space ~
44388 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44389 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
44391 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44393 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44394 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44395 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44396 scanned for the input files.
44397 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44398 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
44399 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44400 compilation may fail for some documents.
44403 \begin_layout Section
44407 \begin_layout Standard
44408 Here you can insert your
44417 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44419 \begin_inset space ~
44423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44425 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44429 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44432 \begin_layout Section
44434 \begin_inset Index idx
44437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44438 Language ! Settings
44444 \begin_inset Index idx
44447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44448 Settings ! Language
44456 \begin_layout Subsection
44458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44460 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44467 \begin_layout Description
44469 \begin_inset space ~
44473 \begin_inset space ~
44476 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44477 You can find its actual translation status here:
44478 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44480 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44487 \begin_layout Description
44489 \begin_inset space ~
44492 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44494 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44495 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44512 The most widespread language package is
44517 \begin_inset Index idx
44520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44521 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44526 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44527 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44528 alternative language package
44533 \begin_inset Index idx
44536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44537 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44542 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44543 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44549 The available selections are described in section
44550 \begin_inset space ~
44554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44556 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44563 \begin_layout Description
44565 \begin_inset space ~
44568 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44569 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44570 An example is the start command
44576 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44581 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44596 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44601 \begin_layout Description
44603 \begin_inset space ~
44611 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44612 command toggles the package on and off.
44615 \begin_layout Description
44617 \begin_inset space ~
44621 \begin_inset space ~
44624 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44628 \begin_layout Description
44630 \begin_inset space ~
44634 \begin_inset space ~
44637 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in LyX's dialogs.
44640 \begin_layout Description
44642 \begin_inset space ~
44646 \begin_inset space ~
44649 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44650 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44651 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44652 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44659 \begin_layout Description
44661 \begin_inset space ~
44664 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44666 When this option is not set, the
44669 \begin_inset space ~
44674 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44675 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44678 \begin_inset space ~
44686 \begin_layout Description
44688 \begin_inset space ~
44694 \begin_inset space ~
44700 When it is not set, the
44703 \begin_inset space ~
44708 is set to the end of the document.
44711 \begin_layout Description
44713 \begin_inset space ~
44717 \begin_inset space ~
44720 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44721 language will be underlined in blue.
44724 \begin_layout Description
44726 \begin_inset space ~
44730 \begin_inset space ~
44733 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44734 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44737 \begin_layout Description
44739 \begin_inset space ~
44742 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44743 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44744 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44745 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44748 \begin_layout Subsection
44752 \begin_layout Standard
44753 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44754 \begin_inset space ~
44758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44760 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44767 \begin_layout Section
44771 \begin_layout Subsection
44775 \begin_layout Description
44777 \begin_inset space ~
44781 \begin_inset space ~
44784 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44787 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44788 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44790 \begin_inset space ~
44796 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44799 \begin_layout Description
44801 \begin_inset space ~
44805 \begin_inset Index idx
44808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44815 \begin_inset Index idx
44818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44819 Settings ! Date format
44824 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44825 \begin_inset Newline newline
44829 \begin_inset Flex URL
44832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44834 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44840 \begin_inset Newline newline
44843 For example the format
44844 \begin_inset Newline newline
44848 \begin_inset Newline newline
44851 prints the date as day/month/year.
44854 \begin_layout Description
44856 \begin_inset space ~
44860 \begin_inset space ~
44863 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44866 \begin_layout Description
44868 \begin_inset space ~
44871 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44873 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44875 \begin_inset space ~
44881 For a detailed description see section
44883 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44888 \begin_inset space ~
44896 \begin_layout Subsection
44898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44905 \begin_inset Index idx
44908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44915 \begin_inset Index idx
44918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44927 \begin_layout Description
44929 \begin_inset space ~
44932 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44937 The name will be used when the
44942 \begin_inset Newline newline
44946 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44954 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44962 \begin_layout Description
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44967 command is the command LyX
44968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44975 LaTeX uses for printing.
44983 \begin_layout Description
44985 \begin_inset space ~
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44992 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44993 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44994 of the program that provides the
45001 \begin_layout Description
45003 \begin_inset space ~
45007 \begin_inset space ~
45011 \begin_inset space ~
45014 printer This option works only for the
45019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45031 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
45032 This is an option only for dvips experts.
45035 \begin_layout Subsection
45040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45050 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
45055 \begin_inset Index idx
45058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45067 \begin_layout Description
45069 \begin_inset space ~
45076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45084 \begin_inset space ~
45088 \begin_inset space ~
45091 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45096 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45117 are used for Cyrillic.
45118 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45131 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45132 LyX sets up in the background.
45133 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45136 \begin_layout Description
45138 \begin_inset space ~
45142 \begin_inset space ~
45145 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45150 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
45153 \begin_layout Description
45155 \begin_inset space ~
45159 \begin_inset space ~
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45167 \begin_inset space ~
45170 options They only have an effect when the program
45174 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45177 \begin_layout Standard
45178 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45179 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45180 manuals of the applications.
45183 \begin_layout Description
45185 \begin_inset space ~
45188 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45189 \begin_inset space ~
45193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45195 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
45202 \begin_layout Description
45204 \begin_inset space ~
45207 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45208 \begin_inset space ~
45212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45214 reference "sub:Index-Program"
45221 \begin_layout Description
45223 \begin_inset space ~
45226 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45227 \begin_inset space ~
45231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45233 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
45240 \begin_layout Description
45245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45253 \begin_inset space ~
45256 command Command for the program
45260 that is described in the section
45266 Additional Features
45271 \begin_layout Standard
45272 There are additionally the following options:
45275 \begin_layout Description
45277 \begin_inset space ~
45281 \begin_inset space ~
45285 \begin_inset space ~
45289 \begin_inset space ~
45293 \begin_inset space ~
45296 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45314 to separate folders.
45315 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
45316 \begin_inset Index idx
45319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45326 \begin_inset Index idx
45329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45338 \begin_layout Description
45340 \begin_inset space ~
45344 \begin_inset space ~
45348 \begin_inset space ~
45352 \begin_inset space ~
45356 \begin_inset space ~
45360 \begin_inset space ~
45363 changes Removes all manually set
45369 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45370 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45372 \begin_inset space ~
45377 dialog when changing the document class.
45380 \begin_layout Section
45382 \begin_inset space ~
45386 \begin_inset Index idx
45389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45398 \begin_layout Subsection
45400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45402 name "sub:Converters"
45407 \begin_inset Index idx
45410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45419 \begin_layout Standard
45420 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45421 from one format to another.
45422 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45423 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45430 \begin_inset space ~
45435 field and press the
45440 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45444 \begin_inset space ~
45449 drop-down list, modify the
45453 field and press the
45460 \begin_layout Standard
45463 Converter File Cache
45469 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45471 Maximum Age (in days
45474 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45475 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45478 \begin_layout Standard
45479 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45480 definition, is described in the section
45491 \begin_layout Subsection
45493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45495 name "sec:File-Formats"
45500 \begin_inset Index idx
45503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45510 \begin_inset Index idx
45513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45522 \begin_layout Standard
45523 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45532 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45535 \begin_layout Standard
45536 You can also define the
45538 Default output format
45540 that is used when you use
45542 View, Update, View Master Document
45546 Update Master Document
45552 menu or the toolbar.
45555 \begin_layout Standard
45556 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45567 \begin_layout Standard
45568 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45569 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45570 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45571 This is done by specifying a
45576 More about this is described in the section
45587 \begin_layout Chapter
45588 Units available in LyX
45589 \begin_inset Index idx
45592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45601 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45608 \begin_layout Standard
45610 \begin_inset space ~
45614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45616 reference "tab:Units"
45620 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45623 \begin_layout Standard
45624 \begin_inset Float table
45630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45631 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45649 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45657 \begin_inset Tabular
45658 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45659 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45660 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45661 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45812 scaled point (65536
45813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45873 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45928 % of original image width
45935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46142 \begin_layout Chapter
46144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46146 name "chap:Credits"
46153 \begin_layout Standard
46154 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46155 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46158 \begin_layout Itemize
46161 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46164 \begin_layout Itemize
46170 \begin_layout Itemize
46176 \begin_layout Itemize
46182 \begin_layout Itemize
46188 \begin_layout Itemize
46194 \begin_layout Itemize
46200 \begin_layout Itemize
46206 \begin_layout Itemize
46209 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46212 \begin_layout Itemize
46218 \begin_layout Itemize
46224 \begin_layout Itemize
46230 \begin_layout Itemize
46236 \begin_layout Itemize
46242 \begin_layout Itemize
46248 \begin_layout Itemize
46254 \begin_layout Itemize
46260 \begin_layout Itemize
46262 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46271 \begin_layout Standard
46272 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46275 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46282 \begin_layout Bibliography
46283 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46284 LatexCommand bibitem
46291 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46294 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46299 \begin_inset Newline newline
46303 \begin_inset Flex URL
46306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46308 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46316 \begin_layout Bibliography
46317 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46318 LatexCommand bibitem
46319 key "latexcompanion"
46323 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46325 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
46328 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46331 \begin_layout Bibliography
46332 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46333 LatexCommand bibitem
46338 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46341 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
46344 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46347 \begin_layout Bibliography
46348 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46349 LatexCommand bibitem
46356 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
46359 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46362 \begin_layout Bibliography
46363 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46364 LatexCommand bibitem
46376 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46379 \begin_layout Bibliography
46380 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46381 LatexCommand bibitem
46387 \begin_inset Newline newline
46391 \begin_inset Flex URL
46394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46396 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46404 \begin_layout Bibliography
46405 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46406 LatexCommand bibitem
46412 \begin_inset Newline newline
46416 \begin_inset Flex URL
46419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46421 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46429 \begin_layout Bibliography
46430 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46431 LatexCommand bibitem
46437 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46439 name "Documentation"
46440 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46449 \begin_inset Newline newline
46453 \begin_inset Flex URL
46456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46458 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46466 \begin_layout Bibliography
46467 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46468 LatexCommand bibitem
46474 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46476 name "Documentation"
46477 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46481 how to use the program
46486 \begin_inset Newline newline
46490 \begin_inset Flex URL
46493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46495 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46503 \begin_layout Bibliography
46504 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46505 LatexCommand bibitem
46511 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46513 name "Documentation"
46514 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46523 \begin_inset Newline newline
46527 \begin_inset Flex URL
46530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46532 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46540 \begin_layout Bibliography
46541 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46542 LatexCommand bibitem
46548 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46550 name "Documentation"
46551 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46560 \begin_inset Newline newline
46564 \begin_inset Flex URL
46567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46569 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46577 \begin_layout Bibliography
46578 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46579 LatexCommand bibitem
46585 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46587 name "Documentation"
46588 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46592 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46593 \begin_inset Newline newline
46597 \begin_inset Flex URL
46600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46602 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46610 \begin_layout Bibliography
46611 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46612 LatexCommand bibitem
46618 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46620 name "Documentation"
46621 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46625 of the LaTeX-package
46630 \begin_inset Index idx
46633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46634 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46640 \begin_inset Newline newline
46644 \begin_inset Flex URL
46647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46649 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46657 \begin_layout Bibliography
46658 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46659 LatexCommand bibitem
46665 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46667 name "Documentation"
46668 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46672 of the LaTeX-package
46677 \begin_inset Index idx
46680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46681 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46687 \begin_inset Newline newline
46691 \begin_inset Flex URL
46694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46696 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46704 \begin_layout Bibliography
46705 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46706 LatexCommand bibitem
46712 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46714 name "Documentation"
46715 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46719 of the LaTeX-package
46724 \begin_inset Index idx
46727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46728 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46734 \begin_inset Newline newline
46738 \begin_inset Flex URL
46741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46743 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46751 \begin_layout Bibliography
46752 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46753 LatexCommand bibitem
46759 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46761 name "Documentation"
46762 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46766 of the LaTeX-package
46771 \begin_inset Index idx
46774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46775 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46781 \begin_inset Newline newline
46785 \begin_inset Flex URL
46788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46790 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46798 \begin_layout Bibliography
46799 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46800 LatexCommand bibitem
46806 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46808 name "Documentation"
46809 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46813 of the LaTeX-package
46818 \begin_inset Index idx
46821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46822 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46828 \begin_inset Newline newline
46832 \begin_inset Flex URL
46835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46837 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46845 \begin_layout Bibliography
46846 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46847 LatexCommand bibitem
46853 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46855 name "Documentation"
46856 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46860 of the LaTeX-package
46865 \begin_inset Index idx
46868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46869 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46875 \begin_inset Newline newline
46879 \begin_inset Flex URL
46882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46884 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46892 \begin_layout Bibliography
46893 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46894 LatexCommand bibitem
46900 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46902 name "Documentation"
46903 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46907 of the LaTeX-package
46912 \begin_inset Index idx
46915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46916 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46922 \begin_inset Newline newline
46926 \begin_inset Flex URL
46929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46931 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46939 \begin_layout Bibliography
46940 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46941 LatexCommand bibitem
46947 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46950 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46954 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46955 \begin_inset Newline newline
46959 \begin_inset Flex URL
46962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46964 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46972 \begin_layout Bibliography
46973 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46974 LatexCommand bibitem
46980 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46983 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46987 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46988 \begin_inset Newline newline
46992 \begin_inset Flex URL
46995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46997 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47005 \begin_layout Bibliography
47006 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47007 LatexCommand bibitem
47013 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47016 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47020 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
47021 \begin_inset Newline newline
47025 \begin_inset Flex URL
47028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47030 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47038 \begin_layout Bibliography
47039 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47040 LatexCommand bibitem
47046 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47049 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47053 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
47054 \begin_inset Newline newline
47058 \begin_inset Flex URL
47061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47063 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47071 \begin_layout Bibliography
47072 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47073 LatexCommand bibitem
47079 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47082 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47086 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
47087 \begin_inset Newline newline
47091 \begin_inset Flex URL
47094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47096 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47104 \begin_layout Bibliography
47105 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47106 LatexCommand bibitem
47112 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47115 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47119 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
47120 \begin_inset Newline newline
47124 \begin_inset Flex URL
47127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47129 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47137 \begin_layout Bibliography
47138 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47139 LatexCommand bibitem
47145 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47148 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47152 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
47153 \begin_inset Newline newline
47157 \begin_inset Flex URL
47160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47162 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47170 \begin_layout Bibliography
47171 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47172 LatexCommand bibitem
47178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47181 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47185 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
47186 \begin_inset Newline newline
47190 \begin_inset Flex URL
47193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47195 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47203 \begin_layout Bibliography
47204 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47205 LatexCommand bibitem
47211 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47214 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47218 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
47219 \begin_inset Newline newline
47223 \begin_inset Flex URL
47226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47228 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47236 \begin_layout Bibliography
47237 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47238 LatexCommand bibitem
47244 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47247 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47251 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
47252 \begin_inset Newline newline
47256 \begin_inset Flex URL
47259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47261 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47269 \begin_layout Bibliography
47270 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47271 LatexCommand bibitem
47277 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47280 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47284 about new features in
47289 \begin_inset Newline newline
47293 \begin_inset Flex URL
47296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47298 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47306 \begin_layout Standard
47307 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47341 \begin_inset Note Note
47344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47351 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47352 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47353 bibliography is the second one:
47361 \begin_layout Standard
47362 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47363 LatexCommand bibtex
47364 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47365 options "biblio/alphadin"
47372 \begin_layout Standard
47373 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
47376 \begin_layout Standard
47377 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47378 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47384 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47385 LatexCommand printindex